Gardena City Council
December 12, 2023

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect foam insulation from direct sunlight exposure.

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather or when air temperature may fall below 40 degrees F.

1. Do not allow materials to be exposed to moisture during transportation, storage, handling or installation.

2. Mark damp or wet materials, including felts which froth or foam during installation, and remove from site within 24 hours.

B. Do not apply materials to damp, dirty, dusty, or otherwise unsuitable surfaces.

1. Allow concrete surfaces to cure minimum 28 days.

C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed during same day.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of system to resist damage from anticipated sources including damage from wind and water penetration. Repair system and pay for or replace damaged materials and surfaces.

1. Period: Two years.
07 53 10 - 2 Elastomeric PVC Membrane Roofing
TP-281
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty including special manufacturer services as required for manufacturer’s warranty.

1. Period: 20 years.

2. Manufacturer's warranty shall not detract from requirements of extended correction period nor from Owner’s rights under implied and expressed warranties regardless of wording of manufacturer’s warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Carlisle SynTec Systems.

B. GenFlex Roofing Systems Div. GenCorp.

C. Sarnafil Inc.

D. HPG International Inc.

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide reinforced polyvinyl chloride (PVC) type elastomeric sheet membrane roofing system with base flashings, and accessories.

1. System: Fully adhered exposed membrane.

2. Provide roofing system materials by a single manufacturer, except where materials of other manufacturers are specified or approved by Architect.

3. Provide roof insulation, double layer application where indicated.

4. Provide tapered insulation as required to ensure positive 1/4” per foot slopes to drains.

5. Provide roof deck board to separate insulation from roof membrane.

B. Regulatory Requirements

1. Cool Roof System: Comply with California Building Standards Code requirements for “Cool Roof” system including three-year aged solar reflectance value requirements.
a. Label: System to have Cool Roof Rating Council (CRRC) label.

2. Fire and Wind Resistance: Conform to California Building Standards Code requirements for Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Class A roof system, with UL Class 60 wind resistance classification.
07 53 10 - 3 Elastomeric PVC Membrane Roofing
TP-282
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
a. Provide materials conforming to code requirements for roof/ceiling 1-hour fire resistive rating for components and materials indicated in Contract Documents.

C. Roof Membrane: ASTM D4434, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Elastomeric membrane, reinforced, thickness as recommended by roof membrane manufacturer for application involved, but no less than 48 mils.

1. Scrim Reinforcing: Manufacturer's standard fleece, fiberglass, or polyester scrim.

2. Corners and Elastomeric Membrane Flashing: Provide products using same base material as roof membrane; corners preformed.

3. Seams: Solvent welded and seam sealant finished.

4. UV Resistance: Provide materials with demonstrated resistance to ultraviolet light with no visible surface cracking or discoloration based on industry accepted accelerated test methods.

5. Provide materials compounded specifically for application methods and substrates indicated on Drawings; comply with requirements for fire rated materials.

6. Color: As indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of Cool Roof Rated colors where not indicated.

D. Insulation: Provide materials approved for use with specified membrane and suitable for application indicated; provide tapered insulation where insulation is indicated to provide roof slopes.

1. Polyisocyanurate Insulation: ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2 glass fiber faced isocyanurate, with ASTM C1303 Long Term Thermal Resistance (LTTR).

2. Other Types of Insulation: Acceptable subject to manufacturer's recommendations, application involved, and total thickness required for specified thermal resistance.

3. Thermal Resistance: Minimum total R-38.

E. Roof Deck Board: ASTM C1278 with moisture and mold resistant core. Provide as indicated, as required for uniform surface for membrane adherence, and as required for fire and wind ratings.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.

Georgia Pacific/DensDeck Prime.

Johns Manville/Securock.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

F. Accessories: Provide as recommended by membrane manufacturer and system manufacturer as required for complete weather-tight installation, including, but not limited to:
07 53 10 - 4 Elastomeric PVC Membrane Roofing
TP-283
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. Bonding adhesives, splicing cement, and lap sealants and mastics.

Seam plates.

Molded pipe flashing.

Temporary sealing, for end of day closing of membrane.

Mechanical fasteners.

G. Integral Coated Metal Flashings: Provide not less than 24-gage galvanized steel flashings, minimum G90 coating, coated with PVC materials for compatibility with direct bonding to roof membrane, as recommended by system manufacturer.

H. Roof Protection Pads: Provide protection materials as recommended by membrane manufacturer where maintenance traffic is anticipated over membrane.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify deck is dry, clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves and projections detrimental to roofing membrane, and properly sloped for drainage.

B. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set and that cant strips, nailing strips, and reglets are in place.

C. Beginning installation indicates acceptance of substrate.

D. Metal Surfaces: Remove contaminants which may adversely affect adhesion or performance of roofing system; apply metal primer.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install membrane roofing system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions and as required to meet requirements for warranty and applicable codes.

1. Comply with NRCA Specification Guide for Thermoset Roof Membranes as applicable; where conflicts exist comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Insulation: Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's recommendations and roof membrane manufacturer's recommendations for installation indicated.

1. Place insulation boards butted in close contact; stagger joints between insulation board layers.

2. Bevel insulation to allow snug fit at penetrations; cut neatly around protrusions through roof.
07 53 10 - 5 Elastomeric PVC Membrane Roofing
TP-284
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. Roof Deck Board: Install in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and as required to ensure suitable substrate for membrane roofing over insulation, fire ratings, and wind ratings; secure to roofing deck.

1. Place roof deck boards butted in close contact; stagger joints between roof deck board and insulation board joints.

2. Cut to allow snug fit at penetrations; cut neatly around protrusions through roof.

D. Roof Membrane: Apply membrane in accordance with membrane manufacturer's recommendations and installation instruction. Provide heat welded seams.

1. Apply sheet membrane smooth, free from air pockets, wrinkles, fish-mouths, unlapped joints, or tears, over first layer insulation.

2. Extend roof membrane up vertical surfaces minimum 8" wherever possible and secure to nailing strips or reglets; reinforce corners with double applications of membrane.

3. Install membrane flashings and seal into membrane.
a. Coordinate installation of roof drains and related flashings.

4. Seal flashings and items projecting through membrane; seal terminations with additional layer of membrane and mastic.

5. Prevent compounds from entering and clogging drains, and from spilling or migrating onto surface of other work.

E. Roof Protection Pads: Secure roof protection pads in place in accordance with membrane manufacturer recommendations and as required to ensure protection of membrane from roof maintenance traffic.

1. Set pads to allow roof drainage; where pads cross drainage path set with not less than 4" and not more than 8" between pads.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Tests: Flood test roofing prior to installation of insulation and ballast; if defects are revealed, repair and repeat flood test until no defects are revealed.

1. Do not overload structure with flood test; if necessary, section off areas as necessary.

2. Test for leaks with 2" depth of water maintained for 24 hours.

B. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Manufacturer's representative shall inspect work of Project on regular basis and provide certification roofing system has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Provide unobstructed access to roofing work.
07 53 10 - 6 Elastomeric PVC Membrane Roofing
TP-285
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Correct defects and irregularities as advised by manufacturer's representative.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove roofing membrane markings from finished surfaces.

B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by roofing work, consult manufacturer of finished surfaces for recommended cleaning methods.

C. Leave completed roof free from debris and uniform in appearance.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Where work must continue over finished roofing membrane, protect surface in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

END OF SECTION
07 53 10 - 7 Elastomeric PVC Membrane Roofing
TP-286
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 07 60 00

FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide metal flashings and sheet metal including accessories as required for complete weathertight installation.

1. Flashing and sheet metal includes copings, fascias, scuppers, gutters, downspouts, rainwater leaders, reglets, and similar fabricated components as applicable to Project.

2. Provide concealed sealants used in conjunction with installation of metal flashing and sheet metal.

3. Provide miscellaneous sheet metal flashing and reglets not provided by other trades or suppliers.
a. Where reglets are to be installed in conjunction with other work, provide in adequate time for installation.
b. Where reglets are to be surface applied, provide continuous gasket between reglet and surface.

4. Provide precast concrete splash blocks.

B. Related Sections:

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. Section 06 10 50: Miscellaneous rough carpentry.

Section 07 28 00: Concealed flashing at weather barrier/underlayment.

Section 07 41 10: Flashing and sheet metal integral with metal roofing.

Section 07 95 00: Expansion joint cover assemblies at roofing.

Section 08 91 00: Louvers.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):

Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish literature for manufactured products.

B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate dimensioning, layout, general construction details including closures, flashings, locations and types of sealants, anchorages, and method of anchorage.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of typical metal flashing fabrication indicating standard soldered joints and edge conditions.
07 60 00 - 1 Flashing and Sheet Metal
TP-287
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements:
1) two years’ successful experience with CAL/Green requirements.

2. CALGreen Requirements: Refer to Section 01 35 15 – CALGreen Environmental Requirements and comply with applicable CALGreen Checklist indicating requirements applicable to Project.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Provide strippable film protective covering on shop finished flashing materials to protect materials through shipping, fabrication and installation.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of system to resist damage from anticipated sources including damage from wind and water penetration. Repair system and pay for or replace damaged materials and surfaces.

1. Period: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide flashing and sheet metal including reglets and accessories as required for complete weathertight installation.

B. Design Criteria: Allow for movement of components without causing buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to 100-year seasonal temperature ranges.

C. Flashing and Sheet Metal:

1. Shop Finished Galvanized Steel Flashing and Sheet Metal: ASTM A924 and A653 G90 galvanized steel; minimum 24-gage; with factory applied fluoropolymer coating based on Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000.
a. Manufacturers:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Ryerson Building Products (800.328.7800)/ColorKlad.

Metal Sales Manuf. Corp.(800.406.7387)/PVDF (Kynar 500).

K&M Sheet Metal (888.567.7778)/Kynar Steel.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
b. Location (Exposed): Where indicated, if not otherwise indicated, provide where flashing will be exposed to view from exterior of building, and where exposed to view from spaces within building.
07 60 00 - 2 Flashing and Sheet Metal
TP-288
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
c. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.
d. Touch-up Paint for Prefinished Sheet Metal: Type recommended by fluoropolymer manufacturer for field touch-up.

2. Stainless Steel Flashing and Sheet Metal: Stainless steel, ASTM A666, Type 304, soft annealed, 2B finish, minimum 26-gage.
a. Location (Exposed): Where indicated, if not otherwise indicated, provide where flashing will be exposed to view from exterior of building, and where exposed to view from spaces within building.

3. Prefinished High-Performance Coated Aluminum: Manufacturer’s standard two coat thermocured fluoropolymer system containing not less than 70-percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; AAMA 2605 and AA-C12C42R1x. a. Manufacturers:
1) Ryerson Building Products (800.328.7800)/AlumaKlad.
2) Merchant & Evans Industries, Inc.(800.257.6215)/Custom. 3) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
b. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.
c. Touch-up Paint for Prefinished Sheet Metal: Type recommended by fluoropolymer manufacturer for field touch-up.

4. Lead Flashing: ASTM B749, type L51121, copper-bearing sheet lead, minimum four pound per square foot (1/16" thick) lead with 6% to 7% antimony content.

5. Accessories: Provide strainers, outlet tubes, screens, baffles, hangers and gutter ends as required for a complete system and complying with SMACNA Manual.

6. Provide heavier gage metal where recommended by SMACNA Manual for size of component.

D. Manufactured Reglets: Snap-on type, for two-piece flashing; metal to match flashing and sheet metal.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.

Fry Reglet Corp./Springlok System.

W.P. Hickman Co./The Leading-Edge Drive Lock System.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

E. Solder and Fasteners: As recommended by SMACNA and complying with applicable codes and regulations; hot dipped galvanized minimum coating comparable to G90. 07 60 00 - 3 Flashing and Sheet Metal
TP-289
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
F. Concealed Sealant: Butyl type for use in conjunction with sheet metal; non-staining; non-corrosive; non-shrinking and non-sagging; ultra-violet and ozone resistant for exterior concealed applications.

G. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color; asbestos free.

H. Plastic Cement: Cutback asphaltic type; asbestos free.

I. Sealing Compound: Type recommended by roofing manufacturer; asbestos free.

J. Gaskets: Type suitable for use in conjunction with sheet metal; non-staining, noncorrosive, non-shrinking, non-sagging, ultra-violet resistant, and ozone resistant; for exterior concealed applications.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.

Emseal USA, Inc./Emseal MST Multi-Use Sealant Tape.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate sheet metal in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

B. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

1. Fabricate corners and intersections in shop with solder joints; watertight fabrication.

C. Form sections in maximum 10'-0" lengths; make allowance for expansion at joints.

D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2".

E. Back-paint flashings with heavy bodied bituminous paint where in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals.

F. Form pitch pans watertight, with minimum 4" upstand and 4" flanges; form pans minimum 6" wider than item passing through roof membrane.

G. Form umbrella flashings with minimum 2" overhang, to shed water away from pitch pans.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal flashing and sheet metal in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1. Install tight in place, with corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles as indicated on Drawings. 07 60 00 - 4 Flashing and Sheet Metal
TP-290
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Lap joints in direction of water flow.

3. Hold downspouts in position, clear of wall, by hangers spaced not more than 10'-0" on center; securely fasten hangers to wall without exposed damage to wall surface.

B. Exercise care when cutting materials on site, to ensure cuttings do not remain on finished surfaces.

C. Provide expansion joints concealed within system.

D. Use concealed fasteners, continuous cleat type, except where specifically approved by Architect.

1. Exposed fasteners may be used, where clearly indicated on shop drawings and approved by Architect, at areas not exposed at exterior walls nor in sight of interior spaces.

E. Apply sealing compound at junction of metal flashing and felt flashing.

F. Lock seams and end joints; fit flashing tight in place; make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.

G.

H.

Counter-flash mechanical and electrical items projecting through roof membrane.

Install sealants where required to prevent direct weather penetration.

1. Install continuous gasket behind surface applied reglets.

I. Completed installation shall be free of rattles, noise due to thermal and air movement, and wind whistles.

J. Install pitch pans and fill with plastic cement.

K. Install umbrella flashing with draw band collars with sheet metal sealant between penetrating item and flashing; use wood blocking at angle type penetrations and cover blocking with sealant.

L. Install splash blocks at locations to interrupt fall of water and direct water flow as indicated on Drawings.

3.2 CLEANING
A. Remove protective coating from shop finished sheet metal when no longer required to protect roofing and flashing from construction.

B. Touch-up scratched and damaged finish to match new; remove and replace sheet metal units that cannot be repaired to look identical to adjacent sheet metal when viewed from 15'-0" away.

END OF SECTION
07 60 00 - 5 Flashing and Sheet Metal
TP-291
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 07 72 00

ROOF HATCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide manufactured roof hatches with integral support curb, operable hardware, counterflashing, and accessories as required for complete, weather-tight installation.

1. Provide fall protection railings where indicated and as required by applicable regulations.

B. Related Sections:

1. 2.

Section 05 50 00: Ladder extenders for roof hatch access.

Section 07 60 00: Flashing roof hatches to roof system.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer’s literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate general construction, configurations, jointing methods and locations when applicable, fastening methods and general details.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Babcock-Davis Hatchways, Inc.

B. Bilco Company.

C. Dur-Red Products, Red Plastic Co., Inc.

D. Milcor, Inc.

E. Nystrom Building Products.

F. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 ROOF HATCHES
A. System Description: Provide manufactured roof hatches, with integral support curb, operable hardware, counterflashing, and accessories.

B. Roof Hatches:

1. Type: Single leaf type.
07 72 00 - 1 Roof Hatches
TP-292
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Size: 3'-0" by 3'-0" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Construction: Construct with full welded corner joints, insulated hatch lids, and insulated internal support curbs.

1. Provide complete with integral counter-flashings to roof flashing system and flanges on support curb for anchorage to roof deck.

2. Loading: Capable of supporting minimum 40-psf external loading and 20-psf internal loading pressure.

D. Opening Hardware: Manufacturer's standard manually operating type.

1. Capable of ensuring effortless control and smooth operation without causing damage to hatch or to roofing system.

2. Capable of being opened from inside and outside.

3. Complete with hold-open mechanism and inside padlock hasps.

E. Fall Protection Integral Railings: Provide railings fixed to roof hatch curbs (not requiring additional penetration of roof assembly); comply with applicable code requirements; welded construction; cap exposed ends.

1. Railing Design Requirements: Comply with applicable codes and regulations requirements but not less than lateral force of 50 lbs. /lin. ft. uniform load and 200 lbs. at any single point without permanent set or damage; ASTM E935.

2. Rails: Seamless steel tube rails, 42" height above roof surface, 1-1/2" outside diameter, continuous railings conforming to applicable code and design requirements.

3. Chain Closures: Provide welded closed link chain capable of supporting same loads as railing and designed to allow easy removal for access from hatch to roof and roof to hatch.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate roof hatches weather-tight, and free of visual distortions and defects.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install roof hatches in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions for complete, weather-tight installation.

B. Coordinate with installation of roofing system and related flashings.

C. Apply bituminous paint on metal surfaces of roof hatches to be in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals.
07 72 00 - 2 Roof Hatches
TP-293
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

END OF SECTION
07 72 00 - 3 Roof Hatches
TP-294
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 07 90 00

JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide joint sealants, for interior and exterior joints not specified elsewhere, with backing rods and accessories as required for complete installation.

1. Joint sealants include joint sealers and calking as indicated.

B. Related Sections:

1. 2.

3. 4.

Section 07 60 00: Flashing and sheet metal concealed sealants.

Section 07 84 00: Firestopping type joint sealants.

Section 08 80 00: Glazing sealants.

Section 09 21 00: Sealants used for acoustical treatment at gypsum board.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's descriptive literature.

B. Samples: Furnish samples of each type of exposed joint sealer in required colors.

C. Certifications:

1. Furnish manufacturer's certification joint sealers comply with Contract Documents and are suitable for Project applications.

2. Furnish certification indicating installers are trained in proper use of specified products, qualified, and familiar with proper installation techniques.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants, and caulks.

1. Provide joint sealants as required by applicable codes and regulations to fill joints and openings in building envelope separating conditioned space from unconditioned space.

B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years successful experience on projects of similar type and size, using specified products.

C. Installers shall be familiar with proper application procedures to ensure maximum joint sealer expansion and contraction capabilities.

D. Mock-Up: Provide exterior joint sealers where required for mock-ups of other systems.
07 90 00 - 1 Joint Sealants
TP-295
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, cure time, and mixing instructions.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under unfavorable weather conditions.

B. Install elastomeric sealants when temperature is in lower third of temperature range recommended by manufacturer.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Extend correction period to two years.

1. Repair or replace joint sealers which fail to perform as intended, because of leaking, crumbling, hardening, shrinkage, bleeding, sagging, staining, loss of adhesion, and loss of cohesion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide joint sealants with backing rods and accessories.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Select materials for compatibility with joint surfaces and indicated exposures.

2. Where not indicated, select modulus of elasticity and hardness or grade recommended by manufacturer for each application indicated.

3. Comply with applicable limitations on volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable regulatory requirements regarding limitations on volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions limitations. 07 90 00 - 2 Joint Sealants
TP-296
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
D. Elastomeric Sealants:

1. Single Component Low Modulus Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920 Type S, Class 25, Grade NS; minimum 50% expansion and compaction capability. a. Provide at exterior locations not exposed to traffic. b. Manufacturers:
1) GE (Momentive Performance Materials)/Silpruf, Silglaz or GESIL. 2) Dow Corning Corp./790 or 795.
3) Pecora Corp./864 Architectural Silicone.
4) Tremco/Spectrem 3.
5) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Multi-Component Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, non-sag; minimum 25% expansion and compaction capability. a. Provide at exterior locations not exposed to traffic. b. Manufacturers:
1) Pecora Corp./Dynatrol II.
2) Tremco/Dymeric 240.
3) BASF/MasterSEal NP 2.
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

3. Single Component Low Modulus Sealant: ASTM C920 Type S, Class 35, Grade NS; minimum 50% expansion and compaction capability.
a. Provide at exterior locations not exposed to traffic. b. Manufacturers:
1) Fortifiber Building Systems Group/Moistop Sealant.
2) Sika Group/SikaFlex 1A+.
3) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

4. Multi-Component Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, self-leveling; minimum 25% expansion and compaction capability. a. Provide at traffic bearing locations.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Pecora Corp./Urexpan NR-200, or Dynatrol II-SG.
2) Tremco/THC 900-901, or Vulkem 445 SSL.
3) BASF/MasterSeal SL 2
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
07 90 00 - 3 Joint Sealants
TP-297
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

5. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Rubber Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, compounded with fungicide, specifically for mildew resistance and recommended for interior joints in wet areas.
a. Provide at interior joints in wet areas.
b. Manufacturers:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
GE (Momentive Performance Materials)/SCS 1702 Sanitary Sealant.

Dow Corning Corp./786 Bathtub Caulk.

Pecora Corp./898 Sanitary Mildew Resistant Sealant.

Tremco/Tremsil 200.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

E. Non-Elastomeric Sealants:

1. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: ASTM C834 acrylic or latex-rubber-modified acrylic sealant, permanently flexible, non-staining and non-bleeding; recommended for general interior exposure; compatible with paints specified in Section 09 90 00. a. Provide at general interior applications.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Pecora Corp./AC-20.
2) Tremco/Tremflex 834.
3) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Air Seals: Provide non-staining and non-bleeding sealers, calks, or foams appropriate to specific applications for filling openings between conditioned and unconditioned spaces.
a. Type: As recommended by manufacturer for each specific application; compatible with adjacent materials.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Dow/Great Stuff.
2) Owens Corning/EnergyComplete Air Sealant.
3) Hilti/Foam Filler CF 812.
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
c. Pest Control Mesh: Openings subject to pest infiltration to have 304 stainless steel wool, material stuffed in joint before application of air seals using methods to ensure blocking of gap from pests.
d. Exception: Annular spaces around pipes, electric cables, conduits and other openings in exterior walls shall be protected against passage of rodents by closing with cementitious grout.
07 90 00 - 4 Joint Sealants
TP-298
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
1) Cementitious Grout: ASTM C1107 non-shrink, non-metallic, pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive; type specifically recommended by manufacturer as applicable to job condition.

F. Miscellaneous Materials:

1. Primers/Sealers: Non-staining types recommended by joint sealer manufacturer for joint surfaces to be primed or sealed.

2. Joint Cleaners: Non-corrosive types recommended by joint sealer manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

3. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where bond to substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of joint sealer.

4. Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible polyethylene foam rod or other flexible, permanent, durable non-absorptive material as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer for compatibility with joint sealer.
a. Oversize backer rod minimum 30% to 50% of joint opening.

G. Colors: As indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors where not indicated.

1. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare joint surfaces in accordance with ASTM C1193 and as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer.

B. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of joint sealer; remove dirt, insecure materials, moisture and other substances which could interfere with bond of joint sealer.

C. Prime or seal joint surfaces where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer; do not allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces.

D. Ensure protective coatings on surfaces in contact with joint sealers have been completely stripped.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions and ASTM C1193, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified.
07 90 00 - 5 Joint Sealants
TP-299
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Pest Control: Install stainless steel wool prior to application of backer rods and bond breakers at air seal and as required to ensure complete pest blockage at joints where pest intrusion is a potential.

C. Set sealant backer rods at proper depth or position in joint to coordinate with other work, including installation of bond breakers and sealant; do not leave voids or gaps between ends of backer rods.

1. Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear backer rods.

D. Install bond breaker tape as required to avoid three-sided bond of sealant to substrate and where required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure joint sealers will perform properly.

E. Size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.

F. Employ installation techniques that will ensure joint sealers are deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of bond surfaces equally on opposite sides.

G. Joint Configuration: Fill sealant joint to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture or dirt.

I. Install joint sealers to depths recommended by joint sealer manufacturer but within the following general limitations, measured at center (thin) section of bead.

1. 2.

3. Horizontal Joints: 75% width with minimum depth of 3/8".

Elastomeric Joints: 50% width with minimum depth of 1/4".

Non-Elastomeric Joints: 75% to 125% of joint width.

J. Spillage: Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces.

1. Clean adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage.

K. Cure joint sealers in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability.

L. Maintain finished joints free of embedded matter, ridges and sags.

END OF SECTION
07 90 00 - 6 Joint Sealants
TP-300
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 08 11 10

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide full flush steel (hollow metal) doors and pressed steel frames, including anchors and silencers.

1. Pressed steel frames include both door and window framing.

B. Related Sections:

1. 2.

3. 4.

Section 08 11 25: Interior aluminum doors and frames.

Section 08 17 00: Integrated door opening assemblies.

Section 08 71 00: Door hardware.

Section 08 80 00: Glazing.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Steel Door Institute (SDI): SDI-100 (ANSI/SDI A250.8) - Recommended Specifications - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

B. National Association of Architectural Metal Manuf. (NAAMM): Hollow Metal Manual.

C. Underwriters Laboratories: Standards as applicable to fire rated doors and frames.

1. Materials tested, labeled and inspected by Warnock Hersey International are acceptable upon approval of authorities.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate hardware installation with Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware.

2. Coordinate glass installation with Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate general construction, configuration, jointing methods, reinforcement, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and locations of cut-outs.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Amweld Building Products Inc.
08 11 10 - 1 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
TP-301
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Ceco Door Division Assa Abloy Door Group.

C. Curries Division Assa Abloy Door Group.

D. Door Components, Inc.

E. Republic Doors and Frames.

F. Krieger Steel Products Co.

G. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide full flush steel (hollow metal) doors and pressed steel frames, including anchors and silencers.

B. Doors: Hollow metal flush steel door, 1-3/4" thick.

1. Typical: Full flush with steel channel or welded edge; close top with flush end closer treatment, bottom optional flush or recessed channel; steel stiffened core, insulated at exterior doors; continuous welded seam.

2. Interior Doors: Minimum 0.042” (18-gage).

3. Exterior Doors: Minimum 0.053” (16-gage).

4. Glazed and Louver Doors: Provide systems as indicated on Drawings.

C. Frames:

1. Exterior Frames: Welded (pre-assembled) type.

2. Interior Frames: Knockdown (field-assembled) type; provide 3/8” back bend return on frames at gypsum board.

3. Gage: Minimum 0.053” (16-gage) interior frames, 0.067” (14-gage) exterior frames.

4. Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard resilient type; removable for replacement.

5. Mortar Guard Boxes: Minimum 0.026” (22-gage) mortar guard boxes welded in place; provide where frames may be grouted.

D. Glazing Stops: Full flush type with glass centered in opening, unsecured side integral with unit, secured side fastened with flush, countersunk Allen type fasteners; minimum 0.053” (16-gage).
08 11 10 - 2 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
TP-302
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
E. Fire Rated Units: Construct in accordance with requirements for fire rating, NFPA 252 or UL 10C, and NFPA 80.

1. Labels: Place fire rating labels where visible when doors and frames are in installed, opened position.

2. Fire Ratings: Refer to Drawings for fire rating requirements.

3. Temperature Rise Rating: Provide doors with maximum 450°F Temperature Rise Rating in 30-minute fire exposure period at doors into exit enclosures and where otherwise required by applicable codes.

F. Door Louvers:

1. Interior Doors: Stationary, sight-proof hood or Y type blades of 24-gage steel inserted into door panels full door thickness; no exposed trim.

2. Exterior Doors: Weatherproof Z-shaped blades with U-shaped frames; 1-3/8" thick; blades 1-1/2" on center; 0.053” (16 gage) welded construction. a. Provide removable bird screens on interior faces, 1/2" by 1/2" bronze wire mesh.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Conform to requirements of SDI (ANSI A250 Series) or NAAMM.

B. Reinforce and prepare doors and frames to receive hardware.

1. Refer to Section 08 71 00 for hardware requirements.

C. Frames:

1. Welded Frames: Accurately form and cut mitered corners of welded type frames; continuously weld on inside surfaces (fully welded); grind welded joints to smooth uniform finish.

2. Knocked Down Frames: Accurately form and miter interlocking joints of knocked down frames to maintain hairline alignment of parts when field assembled.

3. Head Reinforcement: Reinforce frames wider than 4'-0" with minimum 0.093” (12 gage) formed steel channels welded in place, flush with top of frames.

4. Doors at Glazed Panels: Reinforce jambs and heads of frames for doors which occur adjacent to glazed sidelights and partitions.

D. Door Silencers:

1. Place three single bumpers on single door frames; space equally along strike jambs.

2. Place two single bumpers on double door frames; place on frame heads. 08 11 10 - 3 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
TP-303
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3. Place three single bumpers for each door on door frames with removable mullions, spaced equally along strike jambs, and in addition place two single bumpers on frame heads to cushion door when mullion is removed.

E. Provide jamb anchors per SDI-100 (ANSI/SDI 250.8) and NAAMM; weld floor jamb anchors in place.

F. Provide double doors tested and approved without astragals.

1. Provide astragals for double doors when required to meet UL requirements for Class A, 3-hour rated doors only.

G. Edge Clearances:

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. Between Doors and Frames: Maximum 1/8" at head and jambs.

Door Sills (No Threshold): Maximum 1/2".

Door Sills (Threshold): Maximum 3/8" above finished floor.

Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: Maximum 1/8".

Fire Rated Doors: As required for fire ratings.

H. Finish: Comply with requirements of Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating for primer including application and compatibility with specified finishes.

1. Interior Units: Prime paint.

2. Exterior Exposed Units: Apply minimum A60 non-spangle galvanized coating, ASTM A924 and A653.
a. Surface treat after galvanizing to remove oils and prepare for painting and apply one coat of primer; comply with requirements in Section 09 90 00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors and frames in accordance with SDI-100 (ANSI/SDI A250.8) and ANSI/SDI A250.11 or NAAMM "Hollow Metal Manual" and with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

1. Install fire rated units in conformance with fire label requirements and NFPA 80.

B. Install doors and frames plumb and square within 1/16”, and with maximum diagonal distortion of 1/32".

C. Remove and replace doors and frames damaged during delivery, storage, installation and construction.

1. Paste filler repair shall not be permitted.

D. After installation, touch-up scratched paint surfaces.

END OF SECTION
08 11 10 - 4 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
TP-304
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 08 11 20

INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES AND DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide aluminum frames, doors, and glazed partitions, with attachments and accessories as required for complete installation.

1. Prepare frames for door hardware.

B. Related Work:

1. 2.

3. Section 08 41 00: Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.

Section 08 71 00: Door hardware.

Section 08 80 00: Glazing.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): Building Materials Directory.

1. Materials tested, labeled and inspected by Warnock Hersey International are acceptable upon approval of authorities.

B. National Association of Architectural Metal Manuf. (NAAMM): Metal Finishes Manual.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate hardware installation with Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

2. Coordinate glass installation with Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, general construction, component connections and locations, anchor methods and locations.

C. Samples: Submit samples of aluminum finish.

1. Submit frame corner construction.
08 11 20 - 1 Interior Aluminum Frames
TP-305
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Wilson Partitions.

B. Western Integrated Materials, Inc.

C. RACO Interior Products.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide aluminum frames for interior doors and glazed partitions, with attachments and accessories.

B. Interior Aluminum Frames: Knock-down (field assembled) door frames; extruded aluminum, ASTM B221, 6063-T5 alloy; profile as indicated.

1. Glazed Partition Frames: Provide extruded aluminum security type snap-in glass stops.

2. Fire Rated Frames: Provide fire rated frames as indicated, approved by California State Fire Marshal and ICBO.

3. Door Stop Gasketing: Provide continuous elastomeric vinyl gasketing at door stop.

C. Fluoropolymer Finish: Fluorocarbon polymer based on Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000.

1. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

D. Anodized Finish: Manufacturer’s standard anodized finish conforming to NAAMM Manual requirements for anodizing, Class I and Class II acceptable.

1. Color: Clear anodized unless otherwise indicated.

2. Color: Bronze anodized as approved by Architect.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum frames to allow for clearances and shim spacing around perimeter; provide for thermal movement.

B. Provide anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fit frames in place.

1. Conceal anchorage devices and fasteners.

C. Accurately fit together joints and corners; match components ensuring continuity of line and design; ensure joints and connections are flush, hairline and weatherproof.

D. Provide required internal reinforcing for door hardware. 08 11 20 - 2 Interior Aluminum Frames
TP-306
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1. Refer to Section 08 71 00 for hardware requirements.

E. Apply coat of bituminous paint on concealed aluminum surfaces to be in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials.

F. Exposed Anodized Surfaces: Apply clear lacquer protective coating, minimum 5 mils dry thickness; conform to AAMA 606.2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install aluminum frames in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer.

1. Install fire rated units in conformance with fire label requirements and NFPA 80.

B. Ensure assemblies are plumb, level and free of warp or twist; maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.

C. Use anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fasten frame assemblies to building.

D. After installation, touch-up scratched and damaged surfaces; remove and replace damaged frames where touch-up is noticeable from 5’-0” or more.

END OF SECTION
08 11 20 - 3 Interior Aluminum Frames
TP-307
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 08 14 00

WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide wood doors as indicated.

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. Provide flush face wood doors.

Provide panel type (stile and rail) wood doors.

Provide interior pressed wood (Masonite) doors.

Provide interior bi-fold louvered wood closet doors with hardware.

Contractor Option: Provide shop finished wood doors.

B. Related Work

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. Section 06 20 00: Wood door frames.

Section 08 11 10: Pressed steel frames.

Section 08 11 20: Interior aluminum frames.

Section 08 71 00: Door hardware.

Section 08 80 00: Glass and glazing for wood doors.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. North American Architectural Woodwork Standards – 3.1, (NAAWS).

B. Window and Door Manufacturer’s Association (WDMA): Guide Specifications.

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): Building Materials Directory.

1. Materials tested, labeled and inspected by Warnock Hersey International are acceptable upon approval of authorities.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Wood Jambs: Coordinate with Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry for prefit wood doors for door jambs.

2. Hardware: Coordinate hardware installation with Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware.

3. Glazing: Coordinate glazing with Section 08 80 00 – Glazing.

4. Painting: Coordinate with Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating whether wood doors are to be shop finished or field painted.
08 14 00 - 1 Wood Doors
TP-308
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate general construction, jointing methods, hardware locations, and locations of cut-outs.

C. Samples: Submit samples of wood doors indicating construction, veneering, and finish.

1. 2.

3. 4.

Submit corner section of each type of door indicated as transparent finished.

Submit corner section of wood panel (stile and rail) door.

Submit corner section of pressed interior wood door.

Submit shop finish for wood doors where doors are furnished shop finished.

D. Certificates: Submit manufacturer certification indicating compliance to applicable requirements of either NAAWS or WDMA Standards; note which standards were followed or if both standards have been met.

1. Wood Product Certification: Furnish certification indicating wood products are from FSC “well-managed” forests.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for composite wood products formaldehyde limitations and paints and coatings.

B. Certified Wood Products: Wood products to be from forests certified “well-managed” by an agency accredited by Forest Stewardship Council (FSC).

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized in accordance with referenced standards requirements applicable to Project location.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for replacing, rehanging, and refinishing wood doors exhibiting defects in materials or workmanship including warp and delamination.

1. Period: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide wood doors as indicated. 08 14 00 - 2 Wood Doors
TP-309
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Solid Core Flush Wood Doors: NAAWS/Premium Grade, 5-Ply Hot Press, 1-3/4" thick solid wood framed glued block construction or particleboard core five ply construction; Contractor option to use WDMA comparable standards.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Eggers Industries Architectural Door Division.

Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.

VT Industries.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Transparent/Stained Wood Veneers: NAAWS/Premium Grade veneers for transparent/stained finish; nominal 1/40" thick before sanding, not less than 1/50” after sanding.
a. Wood Veneers: Types as indicated, as directed by Architect where not otherwise indicated.

3. Opaque Painted Wood Veneers: NAAWS/Custom Grade White Birch veneers for opaque finish; nominal 1/40" thick before sanding, not less than 1/50” after sanding.

4. Edges: Stile edges to match face veneer, minimum 1-1/8" thick after trim.

5. Core: Bond stiles and rails to core and sand prior to assembly of face veneers.

6. Bond Type: Provide Type I Bond for exterior doors, Type II Bond for interior doors.

7. Bond Type: Provide Type II Bond for interior doors.

C. Hollow Core Flush Wood Doors: NAAWS/Custom Grade, 5-Ply Hot Press, 1-3/8" thick standard hollow core five-ply construction; Contractor option to use WDMA comparable standards.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Eggers Industries Architectural Door Division.

Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.

VT Industries.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Transparent/Stained Wood Veneers: NAAWS/Custom Grade White Birch veneers for opaque finish; nominal 1/40" thick before sanding, not less than 1/50” after sanding.
a. Wood Veneers: Types as indicated, as directed by Architect where not otherwise indicated.

3. Opaque Painted Wood Veneers: NAAWS/Custom Grade White Birch veneers for opaque finish; nominal 1/40" thick before sanding, not less than 1/50” after sanding.
08 14 00 - 3 Wood Doors
TP-310
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

4. Edges: Stile edges to match face veneer, minimum 1-1/8" thick after trim.

5. Bond Type: Type II Bond, interior.

D. Panel (Stile and Rail) Doors: NAAWS/Custom Grade, configurations as indicated on Drawings; 1-3/4" thick; Contractor option to use WDMA comparable standards.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Eggers Industries Architectural Door Division.

Pinecrest.

Simpson Door Co.

Sun-Dor-Co.

Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Transparent/Stained Finished Solid Wood: NAAWS/Premium Grade solid wood. a. Wood: Types as indicated, as directed by Architect where not otherwise indicated.

3. Transparent/Stained Finished Veneered Wood: NAAWS/Premium Grade veneers for transparent finish; minimum 1/30" (0.033" thick) before sanding. a. Wood Veneers: Types as indicated, as directed by Architect where not otherwise indicated.

4. Opaque Finished Wood: Manufacturers standard softwood species and cut for stiles and rails; with panels of same species.

5. Design: As indicated and conforming with WDMA Design Group matching indicated configurations.

6. Panel Type: Raised panels unless otherwise indicated.

7. Bond Type: Provide Type I Bond for exterior doors, Type II Bond for interior doors.

8. Bond Type: Provide Type II Bond for interior doors.

E. Fire Rated Doors: 1-3/4" thick, match non-rated door appearance; comply with applicable codes; UL or Warnock Hersey rated.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Eggers Industries Architectural Door Division.

Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.

VT Industries.

Karona, Inc.

Sun-Dor-Co.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
08 14 00 - 4 Wood Doors
TP-311
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Labels: Place fire rating labels where visible when doors are installed, in opened position.

3. Fire Ratings: Refer to Drawings for fire rating requirements.

4. Core: Use wood core construction for 20 minute rated flush doors, mineral core permitted for longer ratings.

5. Temperature Rise Rating: Provide doors with maximum 450°F Temperature Rise Rating in 30-minute fire exposure period at doors into exit enclosures, for horizontal exits, and as required by applicable codes.

F. Pressed Hardboard Faced Wood Doors: Provide pressed hardboard faced wood doors in configurations indicated, as directed by Architect where not otherwise indicated, 1-3/8” thick.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Masonite Corp.

T.M. Cobb.

Lynden Door.

Jeld Wen Windows & Doors.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Bond Type: Type II Bond, interior.

3. Core: Manufacturer’s standard core for specified doors.

4. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard prime paint finish.

G. Bi-Fold Louvered Wood Closet Doors: Provide manufacturer’s standard wood louvered bi-folding closet doors; provide standard bi-fold hardware consisting of pulls, tracks, and pivots.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.

Jeld-Wen, Inc. (800.535.3936).

Elizabeth Shutters (888.491.6198).

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Basis of Design: Jeld-Wen/Bifold Louver Doors.

H. Metal Louvers for Wood Doors: Roll formed 20 gage galvanized steel; factory primed; inverted ‘V’ type blade; sight-proof.

2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors in accordance with requirements of specified standards.

1. Prefit wood doors.

2. Prepare doors to receive hardware in shop, refer to Section 08 71 00 for hardware requirements and templates.
08 14 00 - 5 Wood Doors
TP-312
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3. Factory machine doors for mortise hardware.

B. Bevel strike edge of single-acting doors, 1/8" in 2".

1. Radius strike edge of double-acting swing doors 2-1/8".

C. Fire Rated Doors: Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) or Warnock Hersey International.

1. Provide fire rated doors with maximum allowable edge strips, of wood species to match face veneers.

2. Provide doors with blocking designed for addition of closers, even where doors are not indicated to receive closers.

3. Provide astragals and metal edge trim for double doors, in accordance with requirements for fire rated doors.

D. Make cut-outs and provide matching wood stops for glass; profiles as indicated, type as selected by Architect where not otherwise indicated.

1. Fire Rated Doors: Provide minimum 18 gage metal stops conforming to fire rating requirements.

E. Shop Finished Doors (Contractor Option): Conform to requirements specified in Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating.

1. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions, and reference standards, plumb and square, and with maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16".

1. Install fire rated wood doors in accordance with requirements for specified fire label and requirements of NFPA 80.
a. Field cutting of fire rated doors shall not be acceptable.

B. Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely.

3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protection: Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure doors are without damage at time of substantial completion.

1. Shop Finished Doors: Refinish or replace damaged doors. 08 14 00 - 6 Wood Doors
TP-313
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

END OF SECTION
08 14 00 - 7 Wood Doors
TP-314
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 08 31 00

ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide access doors set in finished surfaces.

1. Provide access doors and panels as required for access to controls and valves behind finished surfaces.

2. Coordinate with various trades for controls and valves which may be concealed.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of access doors required but not indicated on Architectural Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Milcor Inc.

B. Karp Associates, Inc.

C.

D.

J.L. Industries.

Nystrom Building Products.

E. Elmdor Manufacturing Co.

F. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide access doors and panels set in finished surfaces.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Where doors and panels are in fire rated assemblies provide assemblies listed in Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. "Classified Building Materials Index" for rating shown.

1. Provide UL label on each rated access door.

2. Materials tested, labeled and inspected by Warnock Hersey International are acceptable upon approval of authorities.
08 31 00 - 1 Access Doors and Panels
TP-315
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. Access Doors and Panels: Provide access door and panel assemblies consisting of an integral unit with flush metal doors and panels, complete and ready for installation.

1. Wall Units: Match Milcor/Style M flush panel style; stainless steel.

2. Units Mounted in Plaster: Match MIlcor/Style K, flush panel style. Stainless Steel

3. Gypsum Board Ceilings: Match Milcor/Style ATR recessed panel style to receive gypsum board insert with edges filled and taped. Stainless Steel.

D. Hinges: Provide continuous piano type hinge.

E. Locking Devices: Provide flush, key-operated cylinder lock for each access door; provide two keys per lock and key locks alike, unless otherwise scheduled.

F. Stainless Steel: Where indicated provide Type 304 corrosion resistant nonmagnetic stainless-steel access doors and frames.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units which may vary slightly from sizes shown or scheduled.

B. Fabricate units of continuous welded steel construction; grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.

C. Provide attachment devices and fasteners of type required for specific job conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which access doors are to be installed.

1. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected; installation signifies acceptance of conditions.

B. Obtain specific locations and sizes for required access doors from trades requiring access to concealed equipment; coordinate installation with work of other trades.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for access doors.

1. Install fire rated access doors in accordance applicable code requirements and with requirements of NFPA 80.

B. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb or level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.

C. Adjust hardware and doors after installation for proper operation.

3.3 PROTECTION
08 31 00 - 2 Access Doors and Panels
TP-316
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
A. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.

END OF SECTION
08 31 00 - 3 Access Doors and Panels
TP-317
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 08 33 00

OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide overhead coiling (roll-up) door systems with curtains, guides, counterbalance, hardware, and accessories as required for complete, operational installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 05 50 00: Steel frames at openings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, general construction, component connections and details, anchorage methods, and hardware locations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Cornell Iron Works.

B. The Cookson Co.

C. Overhead Door Corp.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide overhead coiling (roll-up) door systems with curtains, guides, counterbalance, hardware, and accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements (Fire Rated Doors): Where indicated provide assemblies that comply with NFPA 80, tested in accordance with ASTM E152, and listed in Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Building Materials Directory, and bearing UL label.

1. Materials tested, labeled and inspected by Warnock Hersey International are acceptable upon approval of authorities.

2. Oversized Doors: Doors exceeding 120-sf or 24-feet in any length, shall have UL "Certificate of Inspection for Oversize Doors", in lieu of label. 08 33 00 - 1 Overhead Coiling Doors
TP-318
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. Overhead Coiling Doors: Fabricate doors of continuous length for width of door without splices.

1. Crank Hoist Manually Operated Doors: Provide crank hoist operator with maximum 5-lbs. effort to turn crank; door to be easily stopped in any position and remain in position until movement is reactivated.

D. Components:

1. Curtain: Flat-faced interlocking slats, ends of alternate slats fitted with end locks; bottom fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact with floor when curtain is closed.
a. Slats: Aluminum; ASTM B221, alloy 6063.
b. Color selected from manufacturer’s standard paint colors.

2. Curtain Guides: Formed steel angles of required sizes and configurations.

3. Roller Shaft (Counterbalance): Steel pipe and helical steel spring system capable of producing torque to assure easy operation of curtain from any position; adjustable spring tension.

4. Housing: Minimum 24-gage steel, internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and form.

E. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard hardware for door types specified.

1. Locks: Cylindrical.
a. Keying: Keyed in accordance with Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install overhead coiling doors, complete, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

1. Install fire rated doors in accordance with requirements for indicated fire label and NFPA Bulletin No. 80.

2. Coordinate installation of electric operators and controls with electrical service.

B. Fit, align, lubricate, and adjust complete door assembly level and plumb. Provide smooth operation.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test door closing systems operation by smoke detector fire release system.

END OF SECTION
08 33 00 - 2 Overhead Coiling Doors
TP-319
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 08 44 10

GLAZED WINDOW WALL ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide factory finished aluminum framed window wall systems including glass, glazing materials, structural anchors, attachments, shims, and accessories as required for complete weather-tight installation.

1. Window wall systems include storefront systems, curtain wall systems, fixed and operable windows, and aluminum and glass entry door systems, including glazing and hardware.

B. Related Work:

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. Section 07 90 00: Perimeter sealants and back-up materials.

Section 08 42 30: Automatic entrances.

Section 08 51 10: Aluminum windows.

Section 08 71 00: Cylinders for door locks
Section 08 71 15: Low energy automatic door operators.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance Guide Specifications Manual.

B. Glass Association of North America (GANA): Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual.

C. National Association of Architectural Metal Manuf. (NAAMM): Metal Finishes Manual.

D. Definitions: National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM), Glossary of Architectural Metal Terms.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design/Build: Provide special engineering for glazed window wall assemblies to ensure they comply with applicable codes and Contract Documents.

B. Coordination: Coordinate methods for making junctures with adjacent surfaces watertight with Section 07 90 00 – Joint Sealants.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and product data for window wall system, glass, and major manufactured components.
08 44 10 - 1 Glazed Window Wall Assemblies
TP-320
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, clearances, general construction, anchorage locations, and typical details.

1. Include elevations at 1/4 scale, typical unit elevations at 1" scale and half or fullsize detail sections of typical composite members.

2. Indicate joint systems, expansion provisions and glazing details.

C. Test Reports: Submit laboratory reports of tests run on typical section of window wall system.

1. Test for Air Infiltration: ASTM E283 at 6.24-psf pressure difference.

2. Test for Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E331 using static air pressure difference of minimum 20% of inward acting design wind load pressure, but not less than 6.24-psf.

3. Test for Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: AAMA 501.1.

4. Test for Structural Performance: ASTM E330. Minimum test loads shall be those specified.
a. Minimum ultimate loads shall be loads specified multiplied by factors of safety specified in California Building Code.
b. Measure deflections at member center lines and other critical points as deemed appropriate.
c. Safety Factor: Design for specified pressures with no glass breakage, no permanent damage to fasteners, and no permanent deformation of framing exceeding 0.2% of member clear span.
1) Glass safety factor relates to testing procedure, not occurrence of glass breakage in final installation.

D. Design/Build Certificates: Submit certification signed by California licensed structural engineer indicating compliance with Contract Documents and code requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to energy efficiency.

B. Installer Qualifications: Firm acceptable to system manufacturer and with not less than five years successful experience installing systems of comparable type and size.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of system to resist damage from anticipated sources including damage from wind and water penetration.

1. Repair or replace units which fail in materials or workmanship. 08 44 10 - 2 Glazed Window Wall Assemblies
TP-321
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Excessive air infiltration.

Excessive deflections.

Deterioration of finish and deterioration of metal.

Defects in weather-stripping.

Defects in glass.

2. Period: Two years.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty including special manufacturer services as required for manufacturer’s warranty.

1. Period: 20 years.

2. Manufacturer's warranty shall not detract from requirements of extended correction period nor from Owner’s rights under implied and expressed warranties regardless of wording of manufacturer’s warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Arcadia, Inc.

B. Kawneer, an Arconic Company.

C. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope.

D. EFCO Corporation.

E. TRACO.

F. C.R. Laurence, United States Aluminum Div.

G. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide factory finished aluminum framed window wall systems including glass, glazing materials, structural anchors, attachments, shims, and accessories, and including storefronts, curtain walls, windows, and entry doors.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of applicable codes.

1. Safety Glass: Comply with applicable building code, CPSC 16 CFR 1201, and pass ANSI Z97.1.

2. Accessibility: Provide for assuring access for persons with disabilities in accordance with state and federal regulations.
a. California Regulations: Comply with California Building Standards Code. 08 44 10 - 3 Glazed Window Wall Assemblies
TP-322
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
b. Federal Regulations: Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards.

3. Energy: Comply with California Energy Commission requirements regarding energy performance of window wall assemblies.
a. Manufacturer shall be responsible for providing information required by authorities necessary to verify conformance.
b. Entire assembly, including glass and glazing, shall be certified by National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) and shall bear NFRC Label indicating energy performance technical information.

C. Design Criteria: Provide complete system with joints, gaps, and penetrations made watertight.

D. Performance Criteria:

1. Deflections and Thermal Movements: Size primary members for deflection limitations and temperature variations as follows; fabricate, assemble and erect work to maintain limitations.
a. Normal-to-wall deflection of L/175 of span; except L/250 of span for glass supporting members.
b. Parallel-to-wall deflection of less than 75% of glass edge clearances. c. Thermal expansion and contraction movements resulting from not less than ambient temperature range of 100 degrees F, which may cause a material temperature range of 160 degrees F.

2. Water and Air Leakage: Installed system shall be free of significant leakage of both water and air.
a. Water leakage is defined as uncontrolled penetration of water (not including condensation) to interior of building.
b. Air leakage is defined as infiltration of air at any area of window wall, at a rate exceeding 0.06 cfm/sf of area, based on measurement of single complete module of system.

3. Condensation: Design system to prevent excessive condensation on indoor faces, with heating and ventilating system in operation, and under following conditions. a. Outdoor: Ambient temperature 20-degrees F; 15-mph wind. b. Indoor: Ambient temperature 75-degrees F; relative humidity of 25%. c. Excessive Condensation: Visible water on more than 10% of interior exposed surface of any section, or accumulation or uncontrolled flow of water from condensation at any location.
08 44 10 - 4 Glazed Window Wall Assemblies
TP-323
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
E. Glazed Aluminum Framed Window Wall Systems: Systems with profiles as indicated on Drawings, minimum 2.5”x5”; provide extruded aluminum security type glass stops of profile to suit frame design.

1. Aluminum Type: As recommended by manufacturer for application indicated, but not less than extruded aluminum, ASTM B221, alloy 6061 or 6063 and temper T5 or T6.
a. Provide thicknesses to comply with loading requirements.

2. Finish: Clear anodized.

F. Doors, Frames, and Hardware: Barrier-free entry doors meeting code requirements for providing access for people with physical disabilities; by entrance manufacturer.

1. Type: Medium stile with 3-1/2” stiles and top rail, and 10" bottom rail.

1. Metal and Finish: Match entrance system.

2. Hardware: Provide complete hardware system except as indicated; match window wall system finish unless otherwise directed by Architect. Coordinate with Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware.
a. Pivots/Closers: Center-hung pivots with concealed adjustable type closer, maximum 5-pound operating pressure when installed in final application. b. Hinges: Extra heavy-duty ball bearing full mortise (butt) hinges complying with requirements specified in Section 08 71 00.
c. Closers: Concealed adjustable type closer, maximum 5-pound operating pressure when installed in final application.
d. Push/Pulls: Types as indicated on Drawings; where not otherwise indicated manufacturer's standard types as selected by Architect; match finish of similar hardware as specified in Section 08 71 00.
e. Security Locks: Manufacturer's standard.
1) Cylinders: Provided under Section 08 71 00.
f. Weather-Stripping, Sweep Strips: Manufacturer's recommended standard type, to suit application.
g. Thresholds: Maximum 1/2" height above adjacent surfaces, with maximum 1/4" vertical section and remainder maximum 1:2 slope.

G. Glass: Provide minimum thicknesses specified, but no less than thicknesses required based on window size and configuration and anticipated wind loading.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Vitro Architectural Glass (PPG).
08 44 10 - 5 Glazed Window Wall Assemblies
TP-324
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
b.
c.
d.
e.

Guardian Industries Corp.

Oldcastle Glass.

Viracon.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Float Glass: Select glazing quality, clear float glass, ASTM C1036; nominal thickness 1/4".

3. Tempered Glass: Select glazing quality, clear float glass, fully tempered, ASTM C1048; nominal thickness 1/4"; safety glass.

4. Tinted Glass: Manufacturer's standard tint as directed by Architect. a. Use one thickness of tinted glass throughout unless otherwise indicated or approved in advance by Architect.

5. Insulated Glass: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed panes of glass enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space with minus 20-degree F dew point.
a. Performance: Certified to ASTM E2190 by Insulating Glass Certification Council.
b. System: Manufacturer's standard dual seal system compatible with glazing system, and including spacers, desiccant, and standard corner construction. c. Glass:
1) Float Glass (Typical): Select glazing quality, clear float glass, ASTM C1036; nominal thickness 1/4".
2) Tempered Glass (Where Indicated and Where Safety Glazing is Required): Select glazing quality, clear float glass, fully tempered, ASTM C1048; nominal thickness 1/4"; safety glass.
3) Low Emissivity Coating: Provide high performance Low E coating on Number 2 surface, comparable to Vitro (PPG)/SolarBan 60. 4) Tinted Glass: Manufacturer's standard tint as directed by Architect. a) Use one thickness of tinted glass throughout unless otherwise indicated or approved in advance by Architect.
5) Spandrel Glass: Double density ceramic frit, heat strengthened spandrel glass; nominal 1/4" thickness.
d. Total Unit Thickness: 1".

H. Glazing Materials: Of type recommended by system manufacturer to suit security locations and applications for glazing installation; designed to maintain glass in place and prevent movement.
08 44 10 - 6 Glazed Window Wall Assemblies
TP-325
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 80-90 Shore A durometer hardness; 4" long by 3/8" thick by 1/4" high; ASTM C864.

2. Spacer Shims: Neoprene or EPDM; 45-55 Shore A durometer hardness; 3" long by 3/32" thick by 1/4" high; ASTM C864.

3. Edge Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 60-70 Shore A durometer hardness; 4" long with minimum two per jamb located at top and bottom edges of glass; ASTM C864.

4. Glazing Gaskets: Exterior neoprene or EDPM; interior neoprene, EPDM or vinyl; miter corner joints at exterior applications; conform to ASTM C509 or C864.

5. Glazing Sealants: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, elastomeric one-component silicone glazing sealants as recommended by sealant manufacture for application involved.
a. Manufacturers:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Dow Corning Corp.

General Electric Co.

Pecora Corp.

Tremco Inc.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
b. Structural Glazing: Provide high-modulus structural silicone glazing materials recommended by sealant manufacturer for applications where sealant bonds glass to metal system.
c. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

I. Miscellaneous Materials:

1. Fasteners: Aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel of type which will not cause electrolytic action or corrosion.
a. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for assembly or for application of hardware.
b. Indicate exposed fasteners on shop drawings for specific approval; exposed fasteners shall be Phillips flat-head screws or Allen screws with finish matching item fastened.
c. Provide concealed fasteners for glazing stops.

2. Steel Reinforcement and Brackets: Manufacturer's standard with minimum 2 oz. hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A123, applied after fabrication.

3. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied mastic, SSPC Paint 12, compounded for 30 mil thickness per coat.
08 44 10 - 7 Glazed Window Wall Assemblies
TP-326
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

4. Flashing: Provide sub-sill flashing members for fixed exterior framing; minimum 22-gage sheet aluminum of sizes and shapes indicated and required to drain water to exterior.
a. Finish: Match adjacent aluminum primary members.

5. Anchoring Devices: Corrosion resistant type capable of supporting window wall system and superimposed design loads; design to allow adjustments of system prior to being permanently fastened in place.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate systems to allow for adequate clearances around perimeter and to enable proper installation; allow for thermal movement within window wall construction.

B. Fabricate components allowing for accurate and rigid fit of joints and corners; match components carefully ensuring continuity of line and color, with joints and connections flush, hairline and weatherproof.

C. Provide structural reinforcing within framing members where required to maintain rigidity and as required to accommodate design loads.

D. Allow moisture entering joints and condensation occurring within framing members to drain to exterior.

1. Design drainage system to hold maximum anticipated moisture for 100-year rain cycle without overflowing.

E. Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work prior to cleaning, finishing, treatment, and application of coating.

F. Finishing: After fabrication, prepare surfaces for finishing in accordance with recommendations of aluminum producer and finish manufacturer.

1. Finish components of each assembly simultaneously to attain uniformity of color.

2. Sequence finishing and processing of materials in a predetermined bay-by-bay, floor-by-floor, wall-by-wall plan.

G. Weld by methods recommended by metal manufacturer and AWS; grind exposed welds smooth and restore mechanical finish; remove arises from cut edges and corners to a radius of approximately 1/64".

H. Fit and assemble work at shop to greatest extent possible; disassemble only as required for shipment and erection.

I. Reinforce work as necessary for performance requirements and for support.

1. Provide internal reinforcing for hardware.

J. Separate dissimilar materials with bituminous paint or preformed separators which will prevent corrosion.
08 44 10 - 8 Glazed Window Wall Assemblies
TP-327
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
K. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with plastic inserts or other non-abrasive concealed inserts which permanently prevent "freeze-up" of joint.

L. Fabricate doors and apply hardware in shop. Disassemble only as required for transportation and installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install glazed aluminum window wall assemblies in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions, and to met design criteria and performance criteria indicated, for weather-tight installation.

1. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

B. Ensure assembly is plumb, level and free of warp or twist; maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.

C. Tolerances: Accurately align and locate components to column lines and floor levels; adjust work to conform to following tolerances.

1. Plumb: 1/8" in 10'-0"; 1/4" in 40'-0"; non-cumulative.

2. Level: 1/8" in 20'-0"; 1/4" in 40'-0"; non-cumulative.

3. Alignment: Limit offset to 1/16" where surfaces are flush or less than 1/2" out of flush and separated by less than 2" (by reveal or protruding work); otherwise limit offsets to 1/8".

4. Location: 3/8" maximum deviation from measured theoretical location (any member, and location).

D. Install anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fasten system to building.

E. Provide anchors to be installed in other work, and setting details, in time for proper installation by trades concerned; verify correct placement.

F. Set sill members and similar members in bed of compound, joint fillers or gaskets to provide weather-tight construction.

G. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using proper templates.

1. Install doors to operate freely and smoothly, with a maximum operating pressure of 5-pounds in accordance with California Building Code, Chapter 11B, Division III, Section 1133B2.5.

2. Coordinate installation of cylinders with Section 08 71 00 - Hardware. 08 44 10 - 9 Glazed Window Wall Assemblies
TP-328
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3. Install sill members and thresholds in bed of compound, joint fillers or gaskets to provide weather-tight construction.

H. Install glass in accordance with glass manufacturer's instructions and with GANA "Glazing Manual".

1. Do not allow glass to touch metal surfaces.

3.2 CLEANING
A. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of components, exercising care to avoid damage of finish.

B. Remove excess sealant compounds, dirt and other foreign substances.

C. Mark glass after installation by crossed streamers attached to framing and held away from glass; do not apply markers to surface of glass.

D. Remove nonpermanent labels immediately after sealant cures; cure sealants for high early strength and durability.

3.3 PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Tests: Conduct tests for air and water infiltration with window wall manufacturer's representative present; correct units failing tests; independent laboratory subject to Architect approval.

1. Air Infiltration: Conduct in accordance with ASTM E783 with static difference of specified and with maximum infiltration of 1.5 times amount specified.

2. Water Penetration: Conduct in accordance with ASTM E1105 at static pressure as recommended by NAAMM with no uncontrolled water penetration.

3. Water Spray Test: Conduct in accordance with AAMA 501.2 on lower two floors of building with minimum 75 lineal feet of units.

END OF SECTION
08 44 10 - 10 Glazed Window Wall Assemblies
TP-329
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 08 51 10

ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide aluminum windows with integral flashing, glazing, and accessories as required for complete weather-tight installation.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 07 90 00: Perimeter joint sealers and back-up material.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA), AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S. 2, Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC), and Wood Window and Glass Doors.

B. Glass Association of North America (GANA): Glazing Manual.

C. National Association of Architectural Metal Manuf. (NAAMM): Metal Finishes Manual.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' literature including test results indicating compliance with design criteria.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, general construction, component connections and locations, anchor methods and locations.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of metal finish and glass.

D. Test Reports: Include laboratory test results for STC and OITC rating of units.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to energy efficiency.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack units on edge on wood strips above ground.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Extend correction period to two years.

1. Provide for correcting failure of Sound Transmission Coefficient rating (STC). 08 51 10 - 1 Aluminum Windows
TP-330
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Provide for correcting failure of insulating glass. Failure includes signs of moisture on interior surfaces of insulated glass units and bond failure of laminated glass.

3. Repair or replace systems and materials which fail to perform as intended.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty including special manufacturer services as required for manufacturer’s warranty.

1. Period: 20 years.

2. Manufacturer's warranty shall not detract from requirements of extended correction period nor from Owner’s rights under implied and expressed warranties regardless of wording of manufacturer’s warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Kawneer, an Arconic Company.

B. EFCO Corporation.

C. U.S. Aluminum Division, C.R. Laurence Company, Inc.

D. Arcadia, Inc.

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide quality aluminum windows with glazing, hardware, and accessories as indicated.

1. Manufacturer: Provide each type of window by single manufacturer. Provide all windows by single manufacturer where all types are available from approved manufacturer.

2. Standards: Conform to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2, types as indicated.

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with California Building Code.

1. Safety Glass Standards: Comply with California Building Code and CPSC 16 CFR 1201, and pass ANSI Z97.1.

2. Energy Requirements: Comply with California Energy Commission requirements regarding energy performance of windows.
a. Manufacturer shall be responsible for providing information required by authorities necessary to verify conformance.
08 51 10 - 2 Aluminum Windows
TP-331
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
b. Entire assembly, including glass and glazing, shall be certified by National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) and shall bear NFRC Label indicating energy performance technical information.

B. Performance Requirements: Comply with applicable codes and AAMA 101 for each type of window specified, but no less than as required for Performance Class listed.

1. Structural: Withstand code required wind loads on exterior and on interior when tested in accordance with ASTM E330, without breakage, failure, or malfunction of operation.

2. Forced Entry: Provide systems conforming to ASTM F588 for windows, Performance Level 10 or AAMA 1302.5 where at ground floor and at areas accessible from decks and accessible rooftops.

3. Acoustical Ratings: Provide windows that have been tested under ASTM E90 with minimum Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating and Outdoor Indoor Transmission Class (OITC) ratings as indicated on Drawings.

4. Label: "AAMA Quality Certified" label is required on each window.

C. Aluminum Windows: Provide units meeting requirements of Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association (AAMA) Certification Program.

1. Performance Class: Not less than AAMA -CW (Commercial). a. Provide windows and doors meeting AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2 performance class as required to comply with California Building Code wind loads as listed in Chapter 16.

D. Aluminum: Of sizes, shapes and profiles shown, minimum 2.5”x5”; alloys and tempers as recommended by manufacturer and processor to comply with requirements for performance, fabrication, and finish application.

1. Thermal Breaks: Provide units with thermal breaks in metal to prevent transfer of temperature between interior and exterior surfaces; conform to AAMA 1502 with factor of 45.

2. Divided Lites: True divided lites required.

3. False Mullions: Provide metal or plastic removable false mullions as required to provide patterns indicated.

4. Finish: Clear Anodized Aluminum.

5. Protect finishes with manufacturer recommended methods.

E. Glass:

1. Typical: ASTM C1036, select glazing quality clear float glass; thickness nominal 1/4". 08 51 10 - 3 Aluminum Windows
TP-332
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Insulated Glass: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed panes of glass enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space with -20 degree F dew point. a. Performance: Certified to ASTM E2190 by Insulating Glass Certification Council.
b. System: Manufacturer's standard dual seal system compatible with glazing system, and including spacers, desiccant, and standard corner construction. c. Glass: ASTM C1036, select glazing quality clear float glass; nominal thickness 1/4”.
1) Safety Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT, fully tempered select glazing quality glass; provide where required by applicable codes and regulations; pass ANSI Z97.1.
d. Low E Coating: High performance low emissivity coating comparable to Vitro (PPG)/SolarBan 60 on No. 2 surface.
e. Total Unit Thickness: 1".

F. Glazing Materials: Manufacturer standard type to suit locations and applications.

G. Miscellaneous Materials:

1. Fasteners: Anodized aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel of type not causing electrolytic action or corrosion; provide flush Phillips flat-head or Allen screws where exposed.

2. Finish exposed aluminum fasteners to match aluminum work.

3. Brackets and Reinforcements: Aluminum wherever possible, where steel units are required for higher strength or other unavoidable necessity, hot-dip galvanize after fabrication; ASTM A123 G-90.

4. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 30-mil thickness per coat.

H. Weather-Stripping:

1. Sliding Panels: Double woven pile complying with AAMA 2605.

2. Projecting and Fixed Panels: Neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM D2000, Designations 2BC415 to 3BC620.
08 51 10 - 4 Aluminum Windows
TP-333
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
I. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard secure hardware as approved by Architect; fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, or corrosion resistant material compatible with aluminum; conform to AAMA 101.

1. Operable Units: Deadlock latch mechanism, constructed to prevent accidental lockout and accidental damage if closed in locked position; a. Include feature to permit locking operable windows in 4" open position.

J. Screens: Provide manufacturer's standard screens for windows and conforming to ANSI/SMA 2005; frames finished to match windows.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate units to allow for clearances and shim spacing around perimeter to enable installation; provide for thermal movement and slope and weep sills for drainage.

B. Provide anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fit windows in place.

C. Accurately fit together joints and corners; match components ensuring continuity of line and design; ensure joints and connections are flush, hairline and weatherproof.

D. Apply coat of bituminous paint on concealed aluminum surfaces to be in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials.

E. Glass Installation: Conform to requirements in GANA "Glazing Manual"; glass shall not touch metal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examine surfaces of openings and verify dimensions.

B. Installation of units constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Assemble and anchor various components to allow for expansion and contraction, maintaining weather-tight condition.

B. Install units in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

C. Install work plumb, straight, square, level and in their proper elevation, plane and location, and in proper alignment with other work.

D. Anchor securely in place, separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from corrosion and electrolytic action with other materials.

E. Upon completion of installation, remove protective coatings or coverings and clean aluminum surfaces.
08 51 10 - 5 Aluminum Windows
TP-334
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
F. Adjust hardware for proper operation.

1. Windows to operate freely and smoothly, with maximum operating pressure of 5- pounds.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Tests: Conduct tests for air and water infiltration with window manufacturer's representative present; correct units failing tests.

1. Test: Conduct in accordance with AAMA 502.

2. Air Infiltration: Maximum infiltration of 1.5 times amount specified.

3. Water Penetration: Conduct at pressures recommended by AAMA for specified units.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean windows including glazing using methods recommended by window manufacturer; minimum wash down with solution of mild detergent in warm water applied with soft, clean cloths.

1. 2.

Take care to remove dirt from corners.

Wipe surfaces clean.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect units and glazing from damage from construction operations and from vandalism.

B. Repair or replace damaged metal components. Touch-up damaged finishes.

C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.

END OF SECTION
08 51 10 - 6 Aluminum Windows
TP-335
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 08 71 00 – DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Mechanical and electrified door hardware for:
a. Swinging doors.
b. Gates.

B. Exclusions: Unless specifically listed in hardware sets, hardware is not specified in this section for:

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. Windows
Cabinets (casework), including locks in cabinets
Signage
Toilet accessories
Overhead doors
C. Related Sections:

1. 2.

Division 01 Section “Alternates” for alternates affecting this section.

Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealant requirements applicable to threshold installation specified in this section.

Division 26 sections for connections to electrical power system and for low-voltage wiring.

Division 28 sections for coordination with other components of electronic access control system.

3. 4.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. UL - Underwriters Laboratories

1. 2.

3. 4.

UL 10B - Fire Test of Door Assemblies
UL 10C - Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies
UL 305 - Panic Hardware
B. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI/BHMA A156.31 - Standards for Hardware and Specialties
City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-1 12/20/2022
TP-336
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. California Code of Regulations

1. Title 24: California Building Standards Code

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General:

1. 2.

Submit in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 requirements.

Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify on submittals deviations from Contract Documents, issues of incompatibility or other issues which may detrimentally affect the Work.

Prior to forwarding submittal, comply with procedures for verifying existing door and frame compatibility for new hardware, as specified in PART 3, “EXAMINATION” article, herein.

3. B. Action Submittals:

1. Product Data: Product data including manufacturers’ technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

Riser and Wiring Diagrams: After final approval of hardware schedule, submit details of electrified door hardware, indicating:

2. a. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring and including:
1) Details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems.
2) Schematic diagram of systems that interface with electrified door hardware. 3) Point-to-point wiring.
4) Risers.

3. Samples for Verification: If requested by Architect, submit production sample or sample installations of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated, and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule.
a. Samples will be returned to supplier in like-new condition. Units that are acceptable to Architect may, after final check of operations, be incorporated into Work, within limitations of key coordination requirements.

4. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as illustrated by Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each door or opening, include:
a. Door Index; include door number, heading number, and Architects hardware set number.

Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet: List locking device and function for each opening.

Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.

Name and manufacturer of each item.

Fastenings and other pertinent information.

Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings.

Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.

Mounting locations for hardware.

Door and frame sizes and materials.

Name and phone number for local manufacturer's representative for each product. b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-2 12/20/2022
TP-337
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
k. Operational Description of openings with any electrified hardware (locks, exits, electromagnetic locks, electric strikes, automatic operators, door position switches, magnetic holders or closer/holder units, and access control components).

Operational description should include how door will operate on egress, ingress, and fire and smoke alarm connection.
1) Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.

5. Key Schedule:
a. After Keying Conference, provide keying schedule listing levels of keying as well as explanation of key system's function, key symbols used and door numbers controlled.

Use ANSI/BHMA A156.28 “Recommended Practices for Keying Systems” as guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting optimal keying system.

Provide 3 copies of keying schedule for review prepared and detailed in accordance with referenced DHI publication. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key to unique door designations.

Index keying schedule by door number, keyset, hardware heading number, cross keying instructions, and special key stamping instructions.

Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts and one key system schematic illustrating system usage and expansion.
1) Forward bitting list, key cuts and key system schematic directly to Owner, by means as directed by Owner.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f. Prepare key schedule by or under supervision of supplier, detailing Owner’s final keying instructions for locks.

6. Templates: After final approval of hardware schedule, provide templates for doors, frames and other work specified to be factory prepared for door hardware installation.

C. Informational Submittals:

1. 2.

Qualification Data: For Supplier and Installer.

Product Certificates for electrified door hardware, signed by manufacturer:
a. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies.

3. Certificates of Compliance:
a. Certificates of compliance for fire-rated hardware and installation instructions if requested by Architect or Authority Having Jurisdiction.

Installer Training Meeting Certification: Letter of compliance, signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of installer training meeting specified in “QUALITY ASSURANCE” article, herein.

Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference Certification: Letter of compliance, signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of electrified hardware coordination conference, specified in “QUALITY ASSURANCE” article, herein. b.
c.

4. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes.

5. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-3 12/20/2022
TP-338
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
D. Closeout Submittals:

1. Operations and Maintenance Data : Provide in accordance with Division 01 and include:
a. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes.

Catalog pages for each product.

Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer.

Parts list for each product.

Final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect conditions as-installed.

Final keying schedule
Copies of floor plans with keying nomenclature
As-installed wiring diagrams for each opening connected to power, both low voltage and 110 volts.

Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to identify project.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Substitutions: Comply with product requirements stated in Division 01 and as specified herein.

1. Where specific manufacturer’s product is named and accompanied by “No Substitute,” including make or model number or other designation, provide product specified. (Note:

Certain products have been selected for their unique characteristics and particular project suitability.)
a. Where no additional products or manufacturers are listed in product category, requirements for “No Substitute” govern product selection.

2. Where products indicate “acceptable manufacturers” or “acceptable manufacturers and products”, provide product from specified manufacturers, subject to compliance with specified requirements and “Single Source Responsibility” requirements stated herein.

B. Supplier Qualifications and Responsibilities: Recognized architectural hardware supplier with record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project.

1. 2.

3. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity.

Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.

Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

Coordination Responsibility: Coordinate installation of electronic security hardware with Architect and electrical engineers and provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors.

4. a. Upon completion of electronic security hardware installation, inspect and verify that all components are working properly.

C. Installer Qualifications: Qualified tradesmen, skilled in application of commercial grade hardware with record of successful in-service performance for installing door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project.

D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-4 12/20/2022
TP-339
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.

E. Fire-Rated Door Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Intertek Testing Services, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated, based on testing at positive pressure and according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C and in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.

F. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) at tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa) of water.

G. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 5 lbf (67 N) to release latch.

Locks do not require use of key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

I. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with governing accessibility regulations cited in “REFERENCES” article, herein.

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of wrist and that operate with force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).

2. Maximum opening-force requirements:
a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Bevel raised thresholds with slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.

Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from open position of 70 degrees, door will take at least 3 seconds to move to 3 inches (75 mm) from latch, measured to leading edge of door.

4. J. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01.

1. Attendees: Owner, Contractor, Architect, Installer, Owner’s Security Consultant, and Supplier.

Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including:

2. a. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion.

Preliminary key system schematic diagram.

Requirements for key control system.

Requirements for access control.
b.
c.
d.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-5 12/20/2022
TP-340
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
e. Address for delivery of keys.

K. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01.

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades.

Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in for electrified door hardware.

Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware.

Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.

2. 3.

4. 5.

L. Coordination Conferences:

1. Installation Coordination Conference: Prior to hardware installation, schedule and hold meeting to review questions or concerns related to proper installation and adjustment of door hardware.
a. Attendees: Door hardware supplier, door hardware installer, Contractor. b. After meeting, provide letter of compliance to Architect, indicating when meeting was held and who was in attendance.

2. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference: Prior to ordering electrified hardware, schedule and hold meeting to coordinate door hardware with security, electrical, doors and frames, and other related suppliers.
a. Attendees: electrified door hardware supplier, doors and frames supplier, electrified door hardware installer, electrical subcontractor, Owner, Owner’s security consultant, Architect and Contractor.
b. After meeting, provide letter of compliance to Architect, indicating when coordination conference was held and who was in attendance.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.

1. Deliver each article of hardware in manufacturer’s original packaging.

C. Project Conditions:

1. Maintain manufacturer-recommended environmental conditions throughout storage and installation periods.

2. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project, but not yet installed.

Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.

D. Protection and Damage:

1. Promptly replace products damaged during shipping.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-6 12/20/2022
TP-341
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Handle hardware in manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Correct, replace or repair products damaged during Work.

3. Protect products against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any chemical agent.

E. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.

F. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.

1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction.

Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant.

D. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.

E. Direct shipments not permitted, unless approved by Contractor.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Years from date of Substantial Completion, for durations indicated. a. Closers:
1) Mechanical: 30 years.
b.
c.

Automatic Operators: 2 years
Exit Devices:
1) Mechanical: 3 years.
2) Electrified: 1 year.
d. Locksets:
1) Mechanical: 3 years
2) Electrified: 1 year.
e.
f.

Continuous Hinges: Lifetime warranty.

Key Blanks: Lifetime

2. Warranty does not cover damage or faulty operation due to improper installation, improper use or abuse.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-7 12/20/2022
TP-342
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.9 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools:

1. Furnish complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Where “No Substitute” is noted, submittals and substitution requests for other products will not be considered.

B. Approval of manufacturers and/or products other than those listed as “Scheduled Manufacturer” or “Acceptable Manufacturer” in the individual article for the product category shall be in accordance with QUALITY ASSURANCE article, herein.

C. Approval of products from manufacturers indicated in “Acceptable Manufacturers” is contingent upon those products providing all functions and features and meeting all requirements of scheduled manufacturer’s product.

D. Hand of Door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing, or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown.

E. Where specified hardware is not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect's approval.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Fasteners

1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation.

Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work including prepared for paint surfaces to receive painted finish.

Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units exposed when door is closed except when no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless thru-bolts are required to fasten hardware securely. Review door specification and advise Architect if thru-bolts are required.

Install hardware with fasteners provided by hardware manufacturer.

2. 3.

4. B. Provide screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop plates and other devices necessary for hardware installation.

1. Where fasteners are exposed to view: Finish to match adjacent door hardware material.

C. Cable and Connectors: Hardwired Electronic Access Control Lockset and Exit Device Trim:

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-8 12/20/2022
TP-343
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1. 2.

3. Data: 24AWG, 4 conductor shielded, Belden 9843, 9841 or comparable.

DC Power: 18 AWG, 2 conductor, Belden 8760 or comparable.

Provide type of data and DC power cabling required by access control device manufacturer for this installation.

Where scheduled in the hardware sets, provide each item of electrified hardware and wire harnesses with sufficient number and wire gauge with standardized Molex plug connectors to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide Molex connectors that plug directly into connectors from harnesses, electric locking and power transfer devices. Provide through-door wire harness for each electrified locking device installed in a door and wire harness for each electrified hinge, electrified continuous hinge, electrified pivot, and electric power transfer for connection to power supplies.

4. 2.3 HINGES
A. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Ives 5BB series

2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Hager BB series, McKinney TA/T4A series, Stanley FBB Series
B. Requirements:

1. 2.

Provide five-knuckle ball bearing hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.1. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, up to and including 36 inches (914 mm) wide:
a. Exterior: Standard weight, bronze or stainless steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high b. Interior: Standard weight, steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high

3. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors over 36 inches (914 mm) wide:
a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high

4. 2 inches or thicker doors:
a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze or stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high

5. Provide three hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height, and one additional hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height.

Where new hinges are specified for existing doors or existing frames, provide new hinges of identical size to hinge preparation present in existing door or existing frame.

Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:

6. 7.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Steel Hinges: Steel pins
Non-Ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins
Out-Swinging Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins
Out-Swinging Interior Lockable Doors: Non-removable pins Interior Non-lockable Doors: Non-rising pins

8. Width of hinges: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) at 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, and 5 inches (127 mm) at 2 inches (51 mm) or thicker doors. Adjust hinge width as required for door, frame, and wall conditions to allow proper degree of opening.

Doors 36 inches (914 mm) wide or less furnish hinges 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high; doors greater than 36 inches (914 mm) wide furnish hinges 5 inches (127 mm) high, heavy weight or standard weight as specified.

9. City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-9 12/20/2022
TP-344
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

10. Provide hinges with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with sufficient number and wire gage to accommodate electric function of specified hardware.

Locate electric hinge at second hinge from bottom or nearest to electrified locking component.

11. Provide mortar guard for each electrified hinge specified.

12. Provide spring hinges where specified. Provide two spring hinges and one bearing hinge per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height. Provide one additional bearing hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height.

2.4 CONTINUOUS HINGES
A. Aluminum Geared

1. Manufacturers:
a. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives.
b. Acceptable Manufacturers: Markar, Stanley.

2. Requirements:
a. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.26, Grade 1.

Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges, where specified in the hardware sets, fabricated from 6063-T6 aluminum, with 0.25-inch (6 mm) diameter Teflon coated stainless steel hinge pin.

Provide split nylon bearings at each hinge knuckle for quiet, smooth, self-lubricating operation.

Provide hinges capable of supporting door weights up to 450 pounds, and successfully tested for 1,500,000 cycles.

On fire-rated doors, provide aluminum geared continuous hinges that are classified for use on rated doors by testing agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.

Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges with electrified option scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with sufficient number and wire gage to accommodate electric function of specified hardware.

Install hinges with fasteners supplied by manufacturer.

Provide hinges 1 inch (25 mm) shorter in length than nominal height of door, unless otherwise noted or door details require shorter length and with symmetrical hole pattern.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.

2.5 ELECTRIC POWER TRANSFER
A. Manufacturers:
a. Scheduled Manufacturer: Von Duprin EPT-10
b. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABH PT1000, Securitron CEPT-10 B. Provide power transfer with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with number and gage of wires sufficient to accommodate electric function of specified hardware.

C. Locate electric power transfer per manufacturer’s template and UL requirements, unless interference with operation of door or other hardware items.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-10 12/20/2022
TP-345
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2.6 FLUSH BOLTS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rockwood, Trimco
B. Requirements:

1. Provide automatic, constant latching, and manual flush bolts with forged bronze or stainless steel face plates, extruded brass levers, and with wrought brass guides and strikes. Provide 12 inch (305 mm) steel or brass rods at doors up to 90 inches (2286 mm) in height. For doors over 90 inches (2286 mm) in height increase top rods by 6 inches (152 mm) for each additional 6 inches (152 mm) of door height. Provide dustproof strikes at each bottom flush bolt.

2.7 SURFACE BOLTS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rockwood, Trimco
B. Requirements:

1. Surface bolt s to have 1” throw for maximum security with concealed mounting that prevents vandalism. Units to be constructed of heavy duty steel and cUL listed up to three (3) hours when used on the inactive door of a pair up to 8’ in height.

2.8 COORDINATORS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rockwood, Trimco
B. Requirements:

1. Where pairs of doors are equipped with automatic flush bolts, an astragal, or other hardware that requires synchronized closing of the doors, provide bar-type coordinating device, surface applied to underside of stop at frame head.

Provide filler bar of correct length for unit to span entire width of opening, and appropriate brackets for parallel arm door closers and surface vertical rod exit device strikes.

Factory-prep coordinators for vertical rod devices if required.

2. 2.9 MORTISE LOCKS
A. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Schlage L9000 series

2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: No substitution B. Requirements:

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-11 12/20/2022
TP-346
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1. Provide mortise locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security, and manufactured from heavy gauge steel, containing components of steel with a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance. Provide lock case that is multi-function and field reversible for handing without opening case.

Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.

Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset with full 3/4 inch (19 mm) throw stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latchbolt. Provide deadbolt with full 1 inch (25 mm) throw, constructed of stainless steel.

Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim.

Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Where scheduled, provide a request to exit (RX) switch that is actuated with rotation of inside lever.

Provide motor based electrified locksets with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets and comply with the following requirements:

2. 3.

4. 5.
a. Universal input voltage – single chassis accepts 12 or 24V DC to allow for changes in the field without changing lock chassis.

Fail Safe/Fail Secure – changing mode between electrically locked (fail safe) and electrically unlocked (fail secure) is field selectable without opening the lock case Low maximum current draw – maximum 0.4 amps to allow for multiple locks on a single power supply.

Low holding current – maximum 0.01 amps to produce minimal heat, eliminate “hot levers” in electrically locked applications, and to provide reliable operation in wood doors that provide minimal ventilation and air flow.

Request to Exit Switch (RX) –
b.
c.
d.
e.
1) Modular Design – provide electrified locks capable of using, adding, or changing a modular RX switch without opening the lock case.

Monitoring – where scheduled, provide a request to exit (RX) switch that detects rotation of the inside lever.
2)
f.
g.

Connections – provide quick-connect Molex system standard.

UL Listed – 3 hour fire door

6. Lever Trim: Solid brass, bronze, or stainless steel, cast or forged in design specified, with wrought roses and external lever spring cages. Provide thru-bolted levers with 2-piece spindles.
a.
b.

Lever Design: Schlage 17A.

Tactile Warning (Knurling): Where required by authority having jurisdiction. Provide on levers on exterior (secure side) of doors serving rooms considered to be hazardous.
c.

2.10 ALUMINUM DOOR LOCKS – NARROW STYLE
A. Manufacturer and Product:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Adams Rite 4900 series X 4568/9 Lever or 4590/1 Paddle

2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: No Substitute.

B. Requirements:

1. Provide narrow style aluminum door locks as specified. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-12 12/20/2022
TP-347
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Provide locks with backset as required for door detail with full 5/8 inch (16 mm) throw latchbolt.

3. Provide manufacturer’s standard strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim.

2.11 AUXILIARY LOCKS
A. Deadlocks:

1. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Schlage L400 series b. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: No substitution.

2. Requirements:
a. Provide mortise deadlock series conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156 and function as specified. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. b. Provide deadlocks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset. Provide deadbolt with full 1 inch (25 mm) throw, constructed of stainless steel. c. Provide manufacturer’s standard strike.

2.12 EXIT DEVICES
A. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Von Duprin 98/35 series

2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: No substitutions.

B. Requirements:

1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1, and UL listed for Panic Exit or Fire Exit Hardware. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.

Provide touchpad type exit devices, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or aluminum, plated to standard architectural finishes to match balance of door hardware.

Touchpad: Extend minimum of one half of door width. Match exit device finish, stainless steel for US26, US26D, US28, US32, and US32D finishes; and for all other finishes, provide compatible finish to exit device. No plastic inserts are allowed in touchpads.

Provide exit devices with dead-latching feature for security and for future addition of alarm kits and/or other electrified requirements.

Provide flush end caps for exit devices.

Provide exit devices with manufacturer’s approved strikes.

Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Install exit devices at height recommended by exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and approved by Architect.

Mount mechanism case flush on face of doors, or provide spacers to fill gaps behind devices. Where glass trim or molding projects off face of door, provide glass bead kits.

Removable Mullions: 2 inches (51 mm) x 3 inches (76 mm) steel tube. Where scheduled as keyed removable mullion, provide type that can be removed by use of a keyed cylinder, which is self-locking when re-installed.

Where lever handles are specified as outside trim for exit devices, provide heavy-duty lever trims with forged or cast escutcheon plates. Provide vandal-resistant levers that will travel to 90-degree down position when more than 35 pounds of torque are applied, and which can easily be re-set.

2. 3.

4. 5.

6. 7.

8. 9.

10. City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-13 12/20/2022
TP-348
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
a.
b.

Lever Style: Match lever style of locksets.

Tactile Warning (Knurling): Where required by authority having jurisdiction. Provide on levers on exterior (secure side) of doors serving rooms considered to be hazardous.

11. Provide UL labeled fire exit hardware for fire rated openings.

12. Provide factory drilled weep holes for exit devices used in full exterior application, highly corrosive areas, and where noted in hardware sets.

13. Provide electrified options as scheduled.

2.13 POWER SUPPLIES
A. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Schlage or Von Duprin PS900 series

2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Precision ELR series, Sargent 3500 series, Dynalock 5000 series, Securitron BPS series, Security Door Controls 600 series B. Requirements:

1. Provide power supplies, recommended and approved by manufacturer of electrified locking component, for operation of electrified locks, electrified exit devices, magnetic locks, electric strikes, and other components requiring power supply.

Provide appropriate quantity of power supplies necessary for proper operation of electrified locking components as recommended by manufacturer of electrified locking components with consideration for each electrified component using power supply, location of power supply, and approved wiring diagrams. Locate power supplies as directed by Architect.

Provide regulated and filtered 24 VDC power supply , and UL class 2 listed.

Options:

2. 3.

4. a. Provide power supply, where specified, with internal capability of charging sealed backup batteries 24 VDC, in addition to operating DC load. b. Provide sealed batteries for battery back-up at each power supply where specified. c. Provide keyed power supply cabinet.

5. 6.

Provide power supply in an enclosure, complete, and requiring 120VAC to fused input.

Provide power supply with emergency release terminals, where specified, that allow release of all devices upon activation of fire alarm system complete with fire alarm input for initiating “no delay” exiting mode.

2.14 CYLINDERS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Schlage

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: No substitutions.

B. Requirements:

1. Provide cylinders/cores, from the same manufacturer of locksets, compliant with ANSI/BHMA A156.5; latest revision, Section 12, Grade 1; permanent cylinders; cylinder face finished to match lockset, manufacturer’s series as indicated. Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-14 12/20/2022
TP-349
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Provide cylinders in the below-listed configuration(s), distributed throughout the Project as indicated.
a. Conventional Patented Open: cylinder with interchangeable core.

3. Patent Protection: Cylinders/cores requiring use of restricted, patented keys, patentprotected until the year 2029.

Nickel silver bottom pins.

Replaceable Construction Cores.

4. 5.
a. Provide temporary construction cores replaceable by permanent cores, furnished in accordance with the following requirements.
1) 3 construction control keys
2) 12 construction change (day) keys.
b. Owner or Owner’s Representative will replace temporary construction cores with permanent cores.

2.15 KEYING
A. Provide a factory registered keying system, complying with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference.

B. Provide cylinders/cores keyed into Owner’s existing factory registered keying system, complying with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference.

C. Requirements:

1. Provide permanent cylinders/cores keyed by the manufacturer according to the following key system.
a. Master Keying system as directed by the Owner.

2. Forward bitting list and keys separately from cylinders, by means as directed by Owner.

Failure to comply with forwarding requirements shall be cause for replacement of cylinders/cores involved at no additional cost to Owner.

3. Provide keys with the following features:
a. Material: Nickel silver; minimum thickness of .107-inch (2.3mm) b. Patent Protection: Keys and blanks protected by one or more utility patent(s) until the year, 2029.

4. Identification:
a. Mark permanent cylinders/cores and keys with applicable blind code per DHI publication “Keying Systems and Nomenclature” for identification. Blind code marks shall not include actual key cuts.

Identification stamping provisions must be approved by the Architect and Owner.

Stamp cylinders/cores and keys with Owner’s unique key system facility code as established by the manufacturer; key symbol and embossed or stamped with “DO NOT DUPLICATE” along with the “PATENTED” or patent number to enforce the patent protection.

Failure to comply with stamping requirements shall be cause for replacement of keys involved at no additional cost to Owner.
b.
c.
d.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-15 12/20/2022
TP-350
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
e. Forward permanent cylinders/cores to Owner, separately from keys, by means as directed by Owner.

5. Quantity: Furnish in the following quantities.
a. Change (Day) Keys: 3 per cylinder/core.
b. Permanent Control Keys: 3.
c. Master Keys: 6.

2.16 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Telkee

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: HPC, Lund
B. Requirements:

1. Provide key control system (Lund 1204-250 or equal), including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150% of number of locks required for Project. a. Provide complete cross index system set up by hardware supplier, and place keys on markers and hooks in cabinet as determined by final key schedule. b. Provide hinged-panel type cabinet for wall mounting.

2.17 DOOR CLOSERS
A. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: LCN 4040XP series.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: No Substitute.

B. Requirements:

1. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. ISO 9000 certify closers. Stamp units with date of manufacture code.

Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with high strength cast iron cylinder, and full complement bearings at shaft.

Cylinder Body: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter with 3/4 inch (19 mm) diameter double heattreated pinion journal.

Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F.

Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards.

Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves, with separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck.

Provide closers with solid forged steel main arms and factory assembled heavy-duty forged forearms for parallel arm closers.

Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted.

2. 3.

4. 5.

6. 7.

8. City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-16 12/20/2022
TP-351
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

9. Finish for Closer Cylinders, Arms, Adapter Plates, and Metal Covers: Powder coating finish which has been certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing as described in ANSI Standard A156.4 and ASTM B117, or has special rust inhibitor (SRI).

10. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting.

2.18 ELECTRO-MECHANICAL AUTOMATIC OPERATORS
A. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: LCN Senior Swing

2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Besam SW200i, Horton 4000LE series B. Requirements:

1. Provide low energy automatic operator units that are electro-mechanical design complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.19.
a.
b.
c.
d.

Opening: Powered by DC motor working through reduction gears.

Closing: Spring force.

Manual, hydraulic, or chain drive closers: Not permitted.

Operation: Motor is off when door is in closing mode. Door can be manually operated with power on or off without damage to operator. Provide variable adjustments, including opening and closing speed adjustment. e. Cover: Aluminum.

2. Provide units with manual off/auto/hold-open switch, push and go function to activate power operator, vestibule interface delay, electric lock delay, hold-open delay adjustable from 2 to 30 seconds, and logic terminal to interface with accessories, mats, and sensors.

Provide drop plates, brackets, or adapters for arms as required to suit details.

Provide hard-wired motion sensors and/or actuator switches for operation as specified.

Provide weather-resistant actuators at exterior applications.

Provide key switches, with LED’s, recommended and approved by manufacturer of automatic operator as required for function as described in operation description of hardware sets. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.

Provide complete assemblies of controls, switches, power supplies, relays, and parts/material recommended and approved by manufacturer of automatic operator for each individual leaf. Actuators control both doors simultaneously at pairs. Sequence operation of exterior and vestibule doors with automatic operators to allow ingress or egress through both sets of openings as directed by Architect. Locate actuators, key switches, and other controls as directed by Architect.

Provide units with inputs for smoke evacuation doors, where specified, which allow doors to power open upon fire alarm activation and hold open indefinitely or until fire alarm is reset, presence detector input, which prevents closed door from opening or door that is fully opened from closing, hold open toggle input, which allows remote activation for indefinite hold open and close second time input is activated, vestibule inputs, which allow sequencing operation of two units, and SPDT relay for interfacing with latching or locking devices.

3. 4.

5. 6.

7. 2.19 DOOR TRIM
A. Manufacturers:

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-17 12/20/2022
TP-352
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rockwood, Trimco
B. Requirements:

1. Provide push plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick and beveled 4 edges. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches (102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit.

Provide push bars of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Provide push bars of sufficient length to span from center to center of each stile. Where required, mount back to back with pull.

Provide offset pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with push bar.

Provide flush pulls as scheduled. Where required, provide back-to-back mounted model.

Provide pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with push bar.

Provide pull plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick, beveled 4 edges, and prepped for pull. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches (102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit.

Provide wire pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled.

Provide decorative pulls as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with pull.

2. 3.

4. 5.

6. 7.

8. 2.20 PROTECTION PLATES
A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rockwood, Trimco
B. Requirements:

1. Provide kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates minimum of 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick, beveled four edges as scheduled. Furnish with sheet metal or wood screws, finished to match plates.

2. Sizes of plates:
a. Kick Plates: 10 inches (254 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs b. Mop Plates: 4 inches (102 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs
c. Armor Plates: 36 inches (914 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs

2.21 OVERHEAD STOPS AND OVERHEAD STOP/HOLDERS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturers: Glynn-Johnson

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rixson, Sargent
B. Requirements:

1. Provide heavy duty concealed mounted overhead stop or holder as specified for exterior and interior vestibule single acting doors.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-18 12/20/2022
TP-353
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Provide heavy duty concealed mounted overhead stop or holder as specified for double acting doors.

Provide heavy or medium duty and concealed or surface mounted overhead stop or holder for interior doors as specified. Provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop for interior doors and at any door that swings more than 140 degrees before striking wall, open against equipment, casework, sidelights, and where conditions do not allow wall stop or floor stop presents tripping hazard.

Where overhead holders are specified provide friction type at doors without closer and positive type at doors with closer.

3. 4.

2.22 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rockwood, Trimco
B. Provide door stops at each door leaf:

1. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide convex type where mortise type locks are used and concave type where cylindrical type locks are used.

2. Where a wall stop cannot be used, provide universal floor stops for low or high rise options.

3. Where wall or floor stop cannot be used, provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop.

2.23 THRESHOLDS, SEALS, DOOR SWEEPS, AUTOMATIC DOOR BOTTOMS, AND GASKETING A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Zero International

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: National Guard, Pemko
B. Requirements:

1. Provide thresholds, weather-stripping (including door sweeps, seals, and astragals) and gasketing systems (including smoke, sound, and light) as specified and per architectural details. Match finish of other items.

2. Size of thresholds:
a. Saddle Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by jamb width by door width b. Bumper Seal Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by 5 inches (127 mm) wide by door width

3. Provide door sweeps, seals, astragals, and auto door bottoms only of type where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available.

2.24 SILENCERS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rockwood, Trimco
City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-19 12/20/2022
TP-354
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Requirements:

1. Provide "push-in" type silencers for hollow metal or wood frames.

2. Provide one silencer per 30 inches (762 mm) of height on each single frame, and two for each pair frame.

3. Omit where gasketing is specified.

2.25 FINISHES
A. Finish: BHMA 626/652 (US26D) or BHMA 630 (US32D); except:

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

7. 8.

9. 10.

11. Hinges at Exterior Doors: BHMA 630 (US32D)
Continuous Hinges: BHMA 630 (US32D)
Continuous Hinges: BHMA 628 (US28)
Push Plates, Pulls, and Push Bars: BHMA 630 (US32D)
Protection Plates: BHMA 630 (US32D)
Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA 630 (US32D)
Door Closers: Powder Coat to Match
Wall Stops: BHMA 630 (US32D)
Latch Protectors: BHMA 630 (US32D)
Weatherstripping: Clear Anodized Aluminum
Thresholds: Mill Finish Aluminum
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to installation of hardware, examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Where on-site modification of doors and frames is required:

1. Carefully remove existing door hardware and components being reused. Clean, protect, tag, and store in accordance with storage and handling requirements specified herein.

When modifications are exposed to view, use concealed fasteners, when possible.

Prepare hardware locations and reinstall in accordance with installation requirements for new door hardware and with:

2. 3.
a. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."
Doors in rated assemblies: NFPA 80 for restrictions on on-site door hardware preparation.
b.
c.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-20 12/20/2022
TP-355
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following, unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. 2.

3. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.

Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831.

Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, using only fasteners provided by manufacturer.

C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate.

Protect all installed hardware during painting.

D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

F. Install operating parts so they move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or excessive clearance.

G. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than quantity recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

H. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period.

1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying section.

I. Wiring: Coordinate with Division 26, ELECTRICAL sections for:

1. Conduit, junction boxes and wire pulls.

2. Connections to and from power supplies to electrified hardware.

3. Connections to fire/smoke alarm system and smoke evacuation system.

4. Connection of wire to door position switches and wire runs to central room or area, as directed by Architect.

5. Testing and labeling wires with Architect’s opening number.

J. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.

K. Door Closers: Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors from corridors. Closers shall not be visible in corridors, lobbies and other public spaces unless approved by Architect.

L. Closer/Holders: Mount closer/holders on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors.

M. Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings or in equipment room, or alternate location as directed by Architect.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-21 12/20/2022
TP-356
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1. Coordination: Coordinate provision with the security systems provider to mitigate excessive or redundant purchase.

2. Configuration: Provide least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware.

N. Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
O. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they may impede traffic or present tripping hazard.

P. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

Q. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.

R. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide training for Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-22 12/20/2022
TP-357
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. Locksets, exit devices, and other hardware items are referenced in the following hardware sets for series, type and function. Refer to the above-specifications for special features, options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements.

B. Hardware Sets:

HW SET: 01
QTY
1 1
1 DESCRIPTION
CONT. HINGE

POWER TRANSFER

ELEC PANIC HARDWARE

CATALOG NUMBER
112XY EPT
EPT10 CON
RX-QELX-AX-35A-NL-OP-388-
CON
JB7 OR BY DIV. 28
20-057 ICX
23-030
K-24
8190EZHD 10" O
FINISH
628
689
626
MFR
IVE
VON
VON
EA
EA
EA
a
a
1 a
1 1
1 1
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA

INTERFACE BOX

RIM CYLINDER

FSIC CORE

CYLINDER GUARD RING
90 DEG OFFSET PULL
VON
SCH
SCH
KEE
IVE
626
626
626
630-
316
1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 9542 HL/D MS AS REQ (120/240 a ANCLR VAC)
8310-836T
FS444
39A
103A-223 (OR AS REQ'D. PER

DETAILS/CONDITIONS)

CON-(LENGTH AS REQUIRED)

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL
PS902 900-2RS 900-BBK 120/240
VAC

PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO

POINT WIRING DIAGRAM
LCN
2 a
1 1
1 EA
EA
EA
EA

ACTUATOR, TOUCH

FLOOR STOP

DOOR SWEEP

THRESHOLD
630
626
A
A
LCN
IVE
ZER
ZER
2 1
EA
EA

WIRE HARNESS

DOOR CONTACT
a
a
SCH
628 SCE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY a VON
1 EA DIAGRAM VON
CARD READER AND WIRING BY DIVISION 28.

DOORS NORMALLY LOCKED @ EXTERIOR. PRESENTING CREDENTIAL @ EXTERIOR CARD

READER WILL UNLATCH PANIC HARDWARE FOR MANUAL ENTRY AND ACTIVATE WALL ACTUATOR MOMENTARILY FOR USE WITH AUTOMATIC OPENING. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-23 12/20/2022
TP-358
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
HW SET: 02
QTY
1 1
2 2
1 1
1 1

DESCRIPTION
CONT. HINGE

DEADLOCK

MORTISE CYLINDER

FSIC CORE

CYLINDER GUARD RING

INDICATOR

CYLINDER GUARD

PUSH/PULL BAR

CATALOG NUMBER
112XY
MS1850S
20-061 ICX
23-030
K-24
4089
MS4043
9190EZHD-10"-NO
FINISH
628
628
626
626
626
628
130
630-
316
689
626
AA
A
A
MFR
IVE
ADA
SCH
SCH
KEE
ADA
ADA
IVE
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
1 1
1 1
1 EA
EA
EA
EA
EA

SURFACE CLOSER

FLOOR STOP

RAIN DRIP

DOOR SWEEP

THRESHOLD
4040XP SCUSH
FS444
142AA (OMIT @ OVERHANG)
39A
103A-223 (OR AS REQ'D. PER

DETAILS/CONDITIONS)
LCN
IVE
ZER
ZER
ZER
DOOR SEALS PROVIDED BY ALUMINUM FRAME MANUFACTURER.

HW SET: 03
QTY
1 1

DESCRIPTION
CONT. HINGE

EU MORTISE LOCK

CATALOG NUMBER
112XY TWP CON
L9092TEU 17A RX CON 12/24
VDC
JB7 OR BY DIV. 28
23-030
4040XP EDA
FS444
142AA (OMIT @ OVERHANG)
39A
103A-223 (OR AS REQ'D. PER

DETAILS/CONDITIONS)

CON-(LENGTH AS REQUIRED)

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL

PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO

POINT WIRING DIAGRAM
FINISH
628
630
MFR
IVE
SCH
a
a
EA
EA
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA

INTERFACE BOX

FSIC CORE

SURFACE CLOSER

FLOOR STOP

RAIN DRIP

DOOR SWEEP

THRESHOLD
a VON
SCH
LCN
IVE
ZER
ZER
ZER
626
689
626
AA
A
A
2 1
EA
EA

WIRE HARNESS

DOOR CONTACT
a
a
SCH
628 SCE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY a LGR SCE
1 EA DIAGRAM VON
DOOR SEALS PROVIDED BY ALUMINUM FRAME MANUFACTURER.

CARD READER AND WIRING BY DIVISION 28.

DOOR NORMALLY LOCKED AT OUTSIDE. PRESENTING CREDENTIAL WILL UNLOCK LEVER MOMENTARILY FOR ENTRY. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-24 12/20/2022
TP-359
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
HW SET: 04
QTY
1 1

DESCRIPTION
CONT. HINGE

EU MORTISE LOCK

CATALOG NUMBER
112XY TWP CON
L9092TEU 17A RX CON 12/24
VDC
JB7 OR BY DIV. 28
23-030
100S
4040XP ST-1630
39A
103A-223 (OR AS REQ'D. PER

DETAILS/CONDITIONS)

CON-(LENGTH AS REQUIRED)

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL

PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO

POINT WIRING DIAGRAM
FINISH
628
630
MFR
IVE
SCH
a
a
EA
EA
1 1
1 1
1 1
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA

INTERFACE BOX

FSIC CORE

OH STOP

SURFACE CLOSER

DOOR SWEEP

THRESHOLD
a VON
SCH
GLY
LCN
ZER
ZER
626
630
689
A
A
a
a
2 1
EA
EA

WIRE HARNESS

DOOR CONTACT
SCH
628 SCE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY a LGR SCE
1 EA DIAGRAM VON
DOOR SEALS PROVIDED BY ALUMINUM FRAME MANUFACTURER.

CARD READER AND WIRING BY DIVISION 28.

DOOR NORMALLY LOCKED AT OUTSIDE. PRESENTING CREDENTIAL WILL UNLOCK LEVER MOMENTARILY FOR ENTRY. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-25 12/20/2022
TP-360
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
HW SET: 05
QTY
2 2
1 1
1 DESCRIPTION
CONT. HINGE

POWER TRANSFER

REMOVABLE MULLION

ELEC PANIC HARDWARE

ELEC PANIC HARDWARE

CATALOG NUMBER
112XY EPT
EPT10 CON
KR4954 STAB
RX-QELX-AX-35A-EO-CON
RX-QELX-AX-35A-NL-OP-388-
CON
JB7 OR BY DIV. 28
20-057 ICX
20-061-ICX (MULLION)
23-030
K-24
8190EZHD 10" O
FINISH
628
689
689
626
626
MFR
IVE
VON
VON
VON
VON
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
a
a
a
1 a
1 1
2 1
2 EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA

INTERFACE BOX

RIM CYLINDER

MORTISE CYLINDER

FSIC CORE

CYLINDER GUARD RING
90 DEG OFFSET PULL
VON
SCH
SCH
SCH
KEE
IVE
626
626
626
626
630-
316
ANCLR
AL
1 1
EA
EA
SURF. AUTO OPERATOR

BOLLARD W/CARD
READER

ACTUATOR, TOUCH

FLOOR STOP

RAIN DRIP

DOOR SEALS
9553/9563 SERIES (VERIFY)
SQ-11 X I36-3 (OR SIMILAR)

OUTSIDE
8310-836T
FS444
142AA (OMIT @ OVERHANG)

PROVIDED BY ALUMINUM

DOOR/FRAME MFG
39A
103A-223 (OR AS REQ'D. PER

DETAILS/CONDITIONS)

CON-(LENGTH AS REQUIRED)

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL
PS902 900-4RL 900-BBK 120/240
VAC

PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO

POINT WIRING DIAGRAM
a
a
LCN
WIK
1 a
1 1
1 EA
EA
EA
SET
630
626
AA
LCN
IVE
ZER
B/O
2 1
EA
EA

DOOR SWEEP

THRESHOLD
A
A
ZER
ZER
a
a
4 2
EA
EA

WIRE HARNESS

DOOR CONTACT
SCH
628 SCE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY a VON
1 EA DIAGRAM VON
CARD READER AND WIRING BY DIVISION 28.

DOORS NORMALLY LOCKED @ EXTERIOR. PRESENTING CREDENTIAL @ EXTERIOR CARD

READER WILL UNLATCH PANIC HARDWARE FOR MANUAL ENTRY AND ACTIVATE WALL ACTUATOR MOMENTARILY FOR USE WITH AUTOMATIC OPENING. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-26 12/20/2022
TP-361
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
HW SET: 06
QTY
5 1
1 1
1 DESCRIPTION
HINGE

ELECTRIC HINGE

CONST LATCHING BOLT

DUST PROOF STRIKE

EU MORTISE LOCK

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 CON TW4
FB51P/61P AS REQ'D
DP1/DP2 AS REQ'D
L9092TEU 17A RX CON 12/24
VDC
JB7 OR BY DIV. 28
23-030
4040XP SCUSH
8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS
142AA (OMIT @ OVERHANG)
429AA-S (@ HEAD & JAMBS)
39A
43SP
103A-223 (OR AS REQ'D. PER

DETAILS/CONDITIONS)

CON-(LENGTH AS REQUIRED)

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL

PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO

POINT WIRING DIAGRAM
FINISH
630
630
630
626
630
MFR
IVE
IVE
IVE
IVE
SCH
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
a
a
1 a
1 2
2 1
1 2
1 1
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
SET
EA
EA
EA

INTERFACE BOX

FSIC CORE

SURFACE CLOSER

KICK PLATE

RAIN DRIP

SET SEAL

DOOR SWEEP

ASTRAGAL

THRESHOLD
VON
SCH
LCN
IVE
ZER
ZER
ZER
ZER
ZER
626
689
630
AA
AA
A
SP
A
a
a
2 2
EA
EA

WIRE HARNESS

DOOR CONTACT
SCH
628 SCE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY a LGR SCE
1 EA DIAGRAM VON
CARD READER & WIRING BY DIVISION 28.

DOOR NORMALLY LOCKED AT OUTSIDE. PRESENTING CREDENTIAL WILL UNLOCK LEVER MOMENTARILY FOR ENTRY. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-27 12/20/2022
TP-362
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
HW SET: 07
QTY
4 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1

DESCRIPTION

HW HINGE

POWER TRANSFER

ELEC PANIC HARDWARE

INTERFACE BOX

RIM CYLINDER

FSIC CORE

SURFACE CLOSER

ARMOR PLATE

RAIN DRIP

SET SEAL

DOOR SWEEP

THRESHOLD

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP
EPT10 CON
RX-QELX-PA-AX-98-L-17-CON
JB7 OR BY DIV. 28
20-057 ICX
23-030
4040XP SCUSH
8400 36" X 2" LDW B-CS
142AA (OMIT @ OVERHANG)
429AA-S (@ HEAD & JAMBS)
39A
103A-223 (OR AS REQ'D. PER

DETAILS/CONDITIONS)

CON-(LENGTH AS REQUIRED)

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL
PS902 900-2RS 900-BBK 120/240
VAC

PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO

POINT WIRING DIAGRAM
FINISH
630
689
626
MFR
IVE
VON
VON
VON
SCH
SCH
LCN
IVE
ZER
ZER
ZER
ZER
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
SET
EA
EA
a
a
a
626
626
689
630
AA
AA
A
A
2 1
EA
EA

WIRE HARNESS

DOOR CONTACT
a
a
SCH
628 SCE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY a VON
1 EA DIAGRAM VON
CARD READER & WIRING BY DIVISION 28.

DOORS NORMALLY LOCKED AT EXTERIOR. PRESENTING CREDENTIAL WILL UNLATCH PANIC MOMENTARILY FOR ENTRY. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.

HW SET: 08
QTY
4 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 DESCRIPTION

HW HINGE

STOREROOM LOCK

FSIC CORE

SURFACE CLOSER

KICK PLATE

RAIN DRIP

SET SEAL

DOOR SWEEP

THRESHOLD

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP
L9080T 17A
23-030
4040XP SCUSH
8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS
142AA (OMIT @ OVERHANG)
429AA-S (@ HEAD & JAMBS)
39A
103A-223 (OR AS REQ'D. PER

DETAILS/CONDITIONS)
FINISH
630
626
626
689
630
AA
AA
A
A
MFR
IVE
SCH
SCH
LCN
IVE
ZER
ZER
ZER
ZER
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
SET
EA
EA
City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-28 12/20/2022
TP-363
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
HW SET: 09
QTY
3 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1

DESCRIPTION

HW HINGE

PANIC HARDWARE

RIM CYLINDER

FSIC CORE

SURFACE CLOSER

KICK PLATE

RAIN DRIP

SET SEAL

DOOR SWEEP

THRESHOLD

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP
LD-PA-AX-98-L-17
20-057 ICX
23-030
4040XP SCUSH
8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS
142AA (OMIT @ OVERHANG)
429AA-S (@ HEAD & JAMBS)
39A
103A-223 (OR AS REQ'D. PER

DETAILS/CONDITIONS)
FINISH
630
626
626
626
689
630
AA
AA
A
A
MFR
IVE
VON
SCH
SCH
LCN
IVE
ZER
ZER
ZER
ZER
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
SET
EA
EA
HW SET: 10

QTY DESCRIPTION

GATE HINGES

CATALOG NUMBER

PROVIDED BY GATE

FABRICATOR
PA-AX-98-L-17-WH
20-057 ICX
23-030
8400 10" B-CS

FINISH MFR
B/O
1 1
1 1
EA
EA
EA
EA

PANIC HARDWARE

RIM CYLINDER

FSIC CORE

KICK PLATE
630
626
626
630
VON
SCH
SCH
IVE
BALANCE OF HARDWARE PROVIDED BY GATE FABRICATOR.

PROVIDE MOUNTING PLATES AS REQUIRED.

HW SET: 11
QTY
6 1
1 1
1 1
2 2
2 1
2 1
1 DESCRIPTION
HINGE

CONST LATCHING BOLT

DUST PROOF STRIKE

STOREROOM LOCK

FSIC CORE

COORDINATOR

MOUNTING BRACKET

SURFACE CLOSER

KICK PLATE

SET SEAL

DOOR SWEEP

ASTRAGAL

THRESHOLD

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP
FB51P/61P AS REQ'D
DP1/DP2 AS REQ'D
L9080T 17A
23-030

COR X FL
MB
4040XP SHCUSH
8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS
429AA-S (@ HEAD & JAMBS)
39A
43SP
103A-223 (OR AS REQ'D. PER

DETAILS/CONDITIONS)
FINISH
630
630
626
626
626
628
600
689
630
AA
A
SP
A
MFR
IVE
IVE
IVE
SCH
SCH
IVE
IVE
LCN
IVE
ZER
ZER
ZER
ZER
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
SET
EA
EA
EA
City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-29 12/20/2022
TP-364
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
HW SET: 12

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

ALL HARDWARE PROVIDED BY GATE MANUFACTURER
HW SET: 13
QTY
1 1
1 DESCRIPTION
CONT. HINGE

POWER TRANSFER

ELEC PANIC HARDWARE

CATALOG NUMBER
112XY EPT
EPT10 CON
RX-QELX-AX-35A-NL-OP-388-
CON
JB7 OR BY DIV. 28
20-057 ICX
23-030
8190EZHD 10" O
FINISH
628
689
626
MFR
IVE
VON
VON
EA
EA
EA
a
a
1 1
1 1
EA
EA
EA
EA

INTERFACE BOX

RIM CYLINDER

FSIC CORE
90 DEG OFFSET PULL
a VON
SCH
SCH
IVE
626
626
630-
316
1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 9542 HL/D MS AS REQ (120/240 a ANCLR VAC)
8310-836T
FS444

CON-(LENGTH AS REQUIRED)

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL
PS902 900-2RS 900-BBK 120/240
VAC

PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO

POINT WIRING DIAGRAM
LCN
2 a
1 2
1 EA
EA
EA
EA

ACTUATOR, TOUCH

FLOOR STOP

WIRE HARNESS

DOOR CONTACT
630
626
LCN
IVE
SCH
SCE
a
a 628
1 EA POWER SUPPLY a VON
1 EA DIAGRAM VON
CARD READER AND WIRING BY DIVISION 28.

DOORS NORMALLY LOCKED @ OUTSIDE. PRESENTING CREDENTIAL @ OUTSIDE CARD

READER WILL UNLATCH PANIC HARDWARE FOR MANUAL ENTRY AND ACTIVATE WALL ACTUATOR MOMENTARILY FOR USE WITH AUTOMATIC OPENING. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-30 12/20/2022
TP-365
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
HW SET: 14
QTY
2 1
1 DESCRIPTION
HINGE

ELECTRIC HINGE

EU MORTISE LOCK

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 CON TW4
L9092TEU 17A RX CON 12/24
VDC
JB7 OR BY DIV. 28
23-030
4040XP
FS436/438 AS REQ.D.

CON-(LENGTH AS REQUIRED)

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL

PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO

POINT WIRING DIAGRAM
FINISH
626
626
630
MFR
IVE
IVE
SCH
EA
EA
EA
a
a
1 a
1 1
1 2
1 EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA

INTERFACE BOX

FSIC CORE

SURFACE CLOSER

FLOOR STOP

WIRE HARNESS

DOOR CONTACT
VON
SCH
LCN
IVE
SCH
SCE
626
689
626
a
a 628
1 EA POWER SUPPLY a LGR SCE
1 EA DIAGRAM VON
CARD READER AND WIRING BY DIVISION 28.

DOOR NORMALLY LOCKED AT OUTSIDE. PRESENTING CREDENTIAL WILL UNLOCK LEVER MOMENTARILY FOR ENTRY. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.

HW SET: 15
QTY
2 1
1 DESCRIPTION
HINGE

ELECTRIC HINGE

EU MORTISE LOCK

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 CON TW4
L9092TEU 17A RX CON 12/24
VDC
JB7 OR BY DIV. 28
23-030
4040XP RW/PA
FS436/438 AS REQ.D.

CON-(LENGTH AS REQUIRED)

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL

PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO

POINT WIRING DIAGRAM
FINISH
626
626
630
MFR
IVE
IVE
SCH
EA
EA
EA
a
a
1 a
1 1
1 2
1 EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA

INTERFACE BOX

FSIC CORE

SURFACE CLOSER

FLOOR STOP

WIRE HARNESS

DOOR CONTACT
VON
SCH
LCN
IVE
SCH
SCE
626
689
626
a
a 628
1 EA POWER SUPPLY a LGR SCE
1 EA DIAGRAM VON
CARD READER AND WIRING BY DIVISION 28.

DOOR NORMALLY LOCKED AT OUTSIDE. PRESENTING CREDENTIAL WILL UNLOCK LEVER MOMENTARILY FOR ENTRY. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-31 12/20/2022
TP-366
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
HW SET: 16
QTY
2 1
1 DESCRIPTION
HINGE

ELECTRIC HINGE

EU MORTISE LOCK

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 CON TW4
L9092TEU 17A RX CON 12/24
VDC
JB7 OR BY DIV. 28
23-030
4040XP RW/PA
FS436/438 AS REQ.D.

CON-(LENGTH AS REQUIRED)

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL

PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO

POINT WIRING DIAGRAM
FINISH
626
626
630
MFR
IVE
IVE
SCH
EA
EA
EA
a
a
1 a
1 1
1 2
1 EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA

INTERFACE BOX

FSIC CORE

SURFACE CLOSER

FLOOR STOP

WIRE HARNESS

DOOR CONTACT
VON
SCH
LCN
IVE
SCH
SCE
626
689
626
a
a 628
1 EA POWER SUPPLY a LGR SCE
1 EA DIAGRAM VON
CARD READER AND WIRING BY DIVISION 28.

DOOR NORMALLY LOCKED AT OUTSIDE. PRESENTING CREDENTIAL WILL UNLOCK LEVER MOMENTARILY FOR ENTRY. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.

HW SET: 17
QTY
2 1
1 DESCRIPTION
HINGE

ELECTRIC HINGE

EU MORTISE LOCK

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 CON TW4
L9092TEU 17A RX CON 12/24
VDC
JB7 OR BY DIV. 28
23-030
4040XP
8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS
WS406/407CCV AS REQ'D
SR64

CON-(LENGTH AS REQUIRED)

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL

PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO

POINT WIRING DIAGRAM
FINISH
626
626
630
MFR
IVE
IVE
SCH
EA
EA
EA
a
a
1 a
1 1
1 1
3 2
1 EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA

INTERFACE BOX

FSIC CORE

SURFACE CLOSER

KICK PLATE

WALL STOP

SILENCER

WIRE HARNESS

DOOR CONTACT
VON
SCH
LCN
IVE
IVE
IVE
SCH
SCE
626
689
630
630
GRY
a
a 628
1 EA POWER SUPPLY a LGR SCE
1 EA DIAGRAM VON
CARD READER AND WIRING BY DIVISION 28.

DOOR NORMALLY LOCKED AT OUTSIDE. PRESENTING CREDENTIAL WILL UNLOCK LEVER MOMENTARILY FOR ENTRY. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-32 12/20/2022
TP-367
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
HW SET: 18

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
HW SET: 19
QTY
3 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 DESCRIPTION
HINGE

POWER TRANSFER

ELEC PANIC HARDWARE

INTERFACE BOX

RIM CYLINDER

FSIC CORE

SURFACE CLOSER

FLOOR STOP

DOOR SEALS

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5
EPT10 CON
RX-QELX-PA-AX-98-L-17-CON
JB7 OR BY DIV. 28
20-057 ICX
23-030
4040XP RW/PA
FS436/438 AS REQ.D.

PROVIDED BY ALUMINUM

FRAME MFG

CON-(LENGTH AS REQUIRED)

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL
PS902 900-2RS 900-BBK 120/240
VAC

PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO

POINT WIRING DIAGRAM
FINISH
652
689
626
MFR
IVE
VON
VON
VON
SCH
SCH
LCN
IVE
B/O
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
SET
a
a
a
626
626
689
626
a
a
2 1
EA
EA

WIRE HARNESS

DOOR CONTACT
SCH
628 SCE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY a VON
1 EA DIAGRAM VON
CARD READER AND WIRING BY DIVISION 28.

DOORS ELECTRICALLY DOGGED (UNLOCKED) THROUGH THE ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM DURING NORMAL HOURS. AFTER HOURS DOORS ARE LOCKED (UNDOGGED). COORDINATE WITH ACCESS CONTROL.

AFTER HOURS: PRESENTING CREDENTIAL WILL UNLATCH PANIC MOMENTARILY FOR ENTRY.

FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-33 12/20/2022
TP-368
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
HW SET: 20
QTY
6 2
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 2
2 2
1 1

DESCRIPTION
HINGE

POWER TRANSFER

REMOVABLE MULLION

ELEC PANIC HARDWARE

ELEC PANIC HARDWARE

INTERFACE BOX

MULLION STORAGE KIT

RIM CYLINDER

MORTISE CYLINDER

FSIC CORE

SURFACE CLOSER

FLOOR STOP

MULLION SEAL

DOOR SEALS

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5
EPT10 CON
KR4954 STAB
RX-PA-AX-98-EO-CON
RX-QELX-PA-AX-98-L-17-CON
JB7 OR BY DIV. 28
MT54
20-057 ICX
20-061-ICX (MULLION)
23-030
4040XP RW/PA
FS436/438 AS REQ.D.
8780NBK PSA

PROVIDED BY ALUMINUM

FRAME MFG

CON-(LENGTH AS REQUIRED)

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL
PS902 900-2RS 900-BBK 120/240
VAC

PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO

POINT WIRING DIAGRAM
FINISH
652
689
689
626
626
MFR
IVE
VON
VON
VON
VON
VON
VON
SCH
SCH
SCH
LCN
IVE
ZER
B/O
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
SET
a
a
a
a
689
626
626
626
689
626
BK
4 2
EA
EA

WIRE HARNESS

DOOR CONTACT
a
a
SCH
628 SCE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY a VON
1 EA DIAGRAM VON
CARD READER AND WIRING BY DIVISION 28.

DOORS ELECTRICALLY DOGGED (UNLOCKED) THROUGH THE ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM DURING NORMAL HOURS. AFTER HOURS DOORS ARE LOCKED (UNDOGGED). COORDINATE WITH ACCESS CONTROL.

AFTER HOURS: PRESENTING CREDENTIAL WILL UNLATCH PANIC MOMENTARILY FOR ENTRY.

FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-34 12/20/2022
TP-369
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
HW SET: 21
QTY
6 2
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 2
1 1
1 1
1 4
2 DESCRIPTION
HINGE

POWER TRANSFER

REMOVABLE MULLION

ELEC PANIC HARDWARE

ELEC PANIC HARDWARE

INTERFACE BOX

MULLION STORAGE KIT

RIM CYLINDER

MORTISE CYLINDER

FSIC CORE

SURFACE CLOSER

SURFACE CLOSER

FLOOR STOP

DOOR SEAL

MULLION SEAL

WIRE HARNESS

DOOR CONTACT

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5
EPT10 CON
KR4954 STAB
RX-PA-AX-98-EO-CON
RX-QELX-PA-AX-98-L-17-CON
JB7 OR BY DIV. 28
MT54
20-057 ICX
20-061-ICX (MULLION)
23-030
4040XP RW/PA
4040XP SCUSH
FS436/438 AS REQ.D.
488SBK PSA (HEAD & JAMBS)
8780NBK PSA

CON-(LENGTH AS REQUIRED)

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL
PS902 900-2RS 900-BBK 120/240
VAC

PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO

POINT WIRING DIAGRAM
FINISH
652
689
689
626
626
MFR
IVE
VON
VON
VON
VON
VON
VON
SCH
SCH
SCH
LCN
LCN
IVE
ZER
ZER
SCH
SCE
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
a
a
a
a
689
626
626
626
689
689
626
BK
BK
a
a 628
1 EA POWER SUPPLY a VON
1 EA DIAGRAM VON
CARD READER AND WIRING BY DIVISION 28.

DOORS ELECTRICALLY DOGGED (UNLOCKED) THROUGH THE ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM DURING NORMAL HOURS. AFTER HOURS DOORS ARE LOCKED (UNDOGGED). COORDINATE WITH ACCESS CONTROL.

AFTER HOURS: PRESENTING CREDENTIAL WILL UNLATCH PANIC MOMENTARILY FOR ENTRY.

FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-35 12/20/2022
TP-370
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
HW SET: 22
QTY
5 1
1 1
1 DESCRIPTION
HINGE

ELECTRIC HINGE

CONST LATCHING BOLT

DUST PROOF STRIKE

EU MORTISE LOCK

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 CON TW4
FB51P/61P AS REQ'D
DP1/DP2 AS REQ'D
L9092TEU 17A RX CON 12/24
VDC
JB7 OR BY DIV. 28
23-030
4040XP SHCUSH
8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS
41AA
SR64

CON-(LENGTH AS REQUIRED)

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL

PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO

POINT WIRING DIAGRAM
FINISH
626
626
630
626
630
MFR
IVE
IVE
IVE
IVE
SCH
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
a
a
1 a
1 2
2 1
2 2
2 EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA

INTERFACE BOX

FSIC CORE

SURFACE CLOSER

KICK PLATE

ASTRAGAL

SILENCER

WIRE HARNESS

DOOR CONTACT
VON
SCH
LCN
IVE
ZER
IVE
SCH
SCE
626
689
630
AA
GRY
a
a 628
1 EA POWER SUPPLY a LGR SCE
1 EA DIAGRAM VON
CARD READER & WIRING BY DIVISION 28.

DOOR NORMALLY LOCKED AT OUTSIDE. PRESENTING CREDENTIAL WILL UNLOCK LEVER MOMENTARILY FOR ENTRY. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.

City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-36 12/20/2022
TP-371
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
HW SET: 23
QTY
5 1
1 1
1 DESCRIPTION
HINGE

ELECTRIC HINGE

CONST LATCHING BOLT

DUST PROOF STRIKE

EU MORTISE LOCK

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 CON TW4
FB51P/61P AS REQ'D
DP1/DP2 AS REQ'D
L9092TEU 17A RX CON 12/24
VDC
JB7 OR BY DIV. 28
23-030
4040XP HW/PA
8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS
WS406/407CCV AS REQ'D
41AA
SR64

CON-(LENGTH AS REQUIRED)

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL

PROVIDED BY ACCESS

CONTROL

PROVIDE FACTORY POINT TO

POINT WIRING DIAGRAM
FINISH
626
626
630
626
630
MFR
IVE
IVE
IVE
IVE
SCH
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
a
a
1 a
1 2
2 2
1 2
2 2
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA

INTERFACE BOX

FSIC CORE

SURFACE CLOSER

KICK PLATE

WALL STOP

ASTRAGAL

SILENCER

WIRE HARNESS

DOOR CONTACT
VON
SCH
LCN
IVE
IVE
ZER
IVE
SCH
SCE
626
689
630
630
AA
GRY
a
a 628
1 EA POWER SUPPLY a LGR SCE
1 EA DIAGRAM VON
CARD READER & WIRING BY DIVISION 28.

DOOR NORMALLY LOCKED AT OUTSIDE. PRESENTING CREDENTIAL WILL UNLOCK LEVER MOMENTARILY FOR ENTRY. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.

HW SET: 24
QTY
3 1
1 1
1 1
1 DESCRIPTION
HINGE

PRIVACY LOCK

SURFACE CLOSER

KICK PLATE

MOP PLATE

WALL STOP

DOOR SEALS

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
L9040 17A 09-544 L283-722
4040XP
8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS
8400 4" X 1" LDW B-CS
WS406/407CCV AS REQ'D

PROVIDED BY ALUMINUM

DOOR/FRAME MFG
FINISH
626
626
689
630
630
630
MFR
IVE
SCH
LCN
IVE
IVE
IVE
B/O
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
SET
City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-37 12/20/2022
TP-372
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
HW SET: 25
QTY
3 1
1 1
1 1
1 DESCRIPTION
HINGE

PRIVACY LOCK

SURFACE CLOSER

KICK PLATE

MOP PLATE

WALL STOP

DOOR SEAL

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
L9040 17A 09-544 L283-722
4040XP
8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS
8400 4" X 1" LDW B-CS
WS406/407CCV AS REQ'D
488SBK PSA (HEAD & JAMBS)
FINISH
626
626
689
630
630
630
BK
MFR
IVE
SCH
LCN
IVE
IVE
IVE
ZER
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
HW SET: 26
QTY
3 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1

DESCRIPTION
HINGE

CLASSROOM DEAD LOCK

FSIC CORE

PUSH PLATE

PULL PLATE

SURFACE CLOSER

KICK PLATE

MOP PLATE

WALL STOP

DOOR SEAL

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP
L463T XB11-720
23-030
8200 8" X 16"
8302 10" 4" X 16"
4040XP
8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS
8400 4" X 1" LDW B-CS
WS406/407CCV AS REQ'D
488SBK PSA (HEAD & JAMBS)
FINISH
630
626
626
630
630
689
630
630
630
BK
MFR
IVE
SCH
SCH
IVE
IVE
LCN
IVE
IVE
IVE
ZER
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
HW SET: 27
QTY
3 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1

DESCRIPTION
HINGE

CLASSROOM DEAD LOCK

FSIC CORE

PUSH PLATE

PULL PLATE

SURFACE CLOSER

KICK PLATE

MOP PLATE

WALL STOP

DOOR SEALS

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
L463T XB11-720
23-030
8200 8" X 16"
8302 10" 4" X 16"
4040XP
8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS
8400 4" X 1" LDW B-CS
WS406/407CCV AS REQ'D

PROVIDED BY ALUMINUM

FRAME MFG
FINISH
626
626
626
630
630
689
630
630
630
MFR
IVE
SCH
SCH
IVE
IVE
LCN
IVE
IVE
IVE
B/O
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
SET
City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-38 12/20/2022
TP-373
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
HW SET: 28
QTY
3 1
1 1
1 DESCRIPTION
HINGE

STOREROOM LOCK

FSIC CORE

SURFACE CLOSER

KICK PLATE

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
L9080T 17A
23-030
4040XP SHCUSH
8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS
FINISH
626
626
626
689
630
MFR
IVE
SCH
SCH
LCN
IVE
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
HW SET: 29
QTY
3 1
1 1
1 DESCRIPTION
HINGE

STOREROOM LOCK

FSIC CORE

WALL STOP

DOOR SEAL

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
L9080T 17A
23-030
WS406/407CCV AS REQ'D
488SBK PSA (HEAD & JAMBS)
FINISH
626
626
626
630
BK
MFR
IVE
SCH
SCH
IVE
ZER
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
HW SET: 30
QTY
3 1
1 1
3 DESCRIPTION
HINGE

STOREROOM LOCK

FSIC CORE

FLOOR STOP

SILENCER

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
L9080T 17A
23-030
FS436/438 AS REQ.D.

SR64
FINISH
626
626
626
626
GRY
MFR
IVE
SCH
SCH
IVE
IVE
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
HW SET: 31
QTY
3 1
1 1

DESCRIPTION
HINGE

STOREROOM LOCK

FSIC CORE

FLOOR STOP

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
L9080T 17A
23-030
FS436/438 AS REQ.D.

FINISH
626
626
626
626
MFR
IVE
SCH
SCH
IVE
EA
EA
EA
EA
City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-39 12/20/2022
TP-374
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
HW SET: 32
QTY
3 1
1 1
1 1

DESCRIPTION
HINGE

STOREROOM LOCK

FSIC CORE

SURFACE CLOSER

KICK PLATE

DOOR SEALS

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1HW 5 X 4.5
L9080T 17A
23-030
4040XP SCUSH
8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS

PROVIDED BY ALUMINUM

FRAME MFG
360AA

PER DETAIL
FINISH
626
626
626
689
630
MFR
IVE
SCH
SCH
LCN
IVE
B/O
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
SET
1 1
EA
EA

DOOR BOTTOM

THRESHOLD
AA
A
ZER
ZER
HW SET: 33

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

ALL HARDWARE PROVIDED BY DOOR MANUFACTURER
HW SET: 34
QTY
6 1
1 1
1 2
2 1

DESCRIPTION
HINGE

CONST LATCHING BOLT

DUST PROOF STRIKE

STOREROOM LOCK

FSIC CORE

OH STOP

KICK PLATE

DOOR SEALS

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
FB51P/61P AS REQ'D
DP1/DP2 AS REQ'D
L9080T 17A
23-030
450S
8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS

PROVIDED BY ALUMINUM

DOOR/FRAME MFG
41AA
FINISH
626
630
626
626
626
630
630
MFR
IVE
IVE
IVE
SCH
SCH
GLY
IVE
B/O
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
SET
1 EA ASTRAGAL AA ZER
City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-40 12/20/2022
TP-375
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
HW SET: 35
QTY
6 1
1 1
1 1
2 1
1 2
1 1

DESCRIPTION
HINGE

CONST LATCHING BOLT

DUST PROOF STRIKE

STOREROOM LOCK

FSIC CORE

COORDINATOR

MOUNTING BRACKET

SURFACE CLOSER

SURFACE CLOSER

KICK PLATE

WALL STOP

ASTRAGAL

CATALOG NUMBER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
FB51P/61P AS REQ'D
DP1/DP2 AS REQ'D
L9080T 17A
23-030

COR X FL
MB
4040XP RW/PA
4040XP SCUSH
8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS
WS406/407CCV AS REQ'D
41AA
FINISH
626
630
626
626
626
628
600
689
689
630
630
AA
MFR
IVE
IVE
IVE
SCH
SCH
IVE
IVE
LCN
LCN
IVE
IVE
ZER
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
End of Section
City of Gardena Community Aquatics & Senior Center 087100-41 12/20/2022
TP-376
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 08 71 15

LOW ENERGY DOOR OPERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide low energy automatic door operators for swinging doors, with accessories as required for complete operational installation; system to open and close door upon receipt of an actuating signal.

B. Related Sections:

1. 2.

Section 08 44 10 Glazed Window Wall Assemblies, including standard hardware.

Division 26: Final electrical connections.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A156.19: Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors Standard.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Coordinate low energy door operators with doors, frames, door hardware, and surrounding construction.

B. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing work of this Section. Require attendance of those directly affecting work of this Section.

1. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature and maintenance data.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, general construction, materials and finishes, component connections, anchorage methods and locations and hardware; indicate exposed fasteners for specific approval.

1. Templates and Diagrams: Furnish templates, diagrams, and data necessary for proper installation of closers to fabricators of related work and coordinate.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of each exposed finish.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years successful experience installing door operator units like type specified and acceptable to operator manufacturer. 08 71 15 - 1 Low Energy Door Operators
TP-377
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A.

B.

C.

Horton Automatics/Series 7000.

LCN/4600 Series Electrically Powered Auto-Equalizer.

Dor-O-Matic, Inc./Senior-Swing Automatic Operation.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide low energy automatic door operators for swinging doors, with accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable codes.

1. Power Failure: Doors shall not exceed 50-pounds force to set door in motion and shall not exceed 5 pounds force for pushing or pulling doors open when force applied to latch side of door.

C. Performance Criteria: Provide operators complying with applicable portions of ANSI A156.19, designed for doors of types indicated to receive operators.

D. System Description: Provide low energy automatic door operators for swinging doors, with accessories as required for complete operational installation; system to open and close door upon receipt of an actuating signal.

E. Low Energy Door Operators: Complete operator system including door operator, controls, and attachment system designed for type of doors indicated and complying with requirements of ANSI A156.19 for low energy power operated door operators.

F. Control: As indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of flush wall mounted push-button control units where not otherwise indicated.

1. Provide controls on each side of every door with an operator; number, size, type, and location as indicated and as required by California Building Standards Code to ensure access for persons with disabilities.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication: Provide each automatic door operator as complete, shop fabricated unit.

1. Complete the fabrication, assembly, finishing, application of hardware and other work before shipment, to greatest extent possible.

2. Disassemble only to extent necessary of shipment and installation.

B. Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work prior to cleaning and finishing. Remove arises from cut edges and ease edges and corners to radius of approximately 1/64".
08 71 15 - 2 Low Energy Door Operators
TP-378
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. Conceal fasteners unless otherwise approved by Architect.

D. Reinforce work as necessary for performance requirements, and for support to structure.

E. Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or preformed separators to prevent corrosion; separate metal surfaces at moving joints with non-metallic separators to prevent "freeze-up" of joints.

F. Finish: Match entrance door finish as specified in Section 08 44 10 Glazed Window Wall Assemblies.

G. Special Features:

1. Safety release clutch for obstructed closing and with checking for both opening and closing cycles.

2. Interlocks: Electrical interlocks which prevent operation of doors when locked or latched.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which automatic doors are to be installed; do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions for installation of low energy door operators.

B. Set plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or doors; anchor securely in place.

1. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

C. Install complete door operator system including controls, control wiring and power units.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After operation of completed installation equivalent to three days use, readjust door operators and controls for optimum operating condition and safety.

B. Lubricate operating equipment.

END OF SECTION
08 71 15 - 3 Low Energy Door Operators
TP-379
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
SECTION 08 80 00

GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Provide miscellaneous glass and glazing not provided elsewhere including accessories as required for complete installation.
a.
b.
c.
d.

Provide glazing for metal doors and frames.

Provide glazing for interior aluminum frames.

Provide glazing for metal railings.

Provide polycarbonate mirrors.

B. Related Sections:

1. 2.

3. 4.

Section 08 44 10: Glazed window wall assemblies glazing.

Section 08 51 10: Aluminum window glazing.

Section 08 83 00: Frameless mirrors.

Section 10 28 00: Metal framed mirrors.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Glass Association of North America (GANA): Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish for each type of glass and exposed glazing material.

B. Samples: Furnish samples of exposed glazing accessories.

1.4 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Extend correction period to two years for following.

1. Replacing laminated glass which exhibits signs of delaminating.

2. Replacing insulated glass which exhibits signs of moisture on sealed glass surfaces.

3. Replacing mirrors which exhibit signs of desilvering or signs of distortion. 08 80 00 - 1 Glazing
TP-380
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Section includes miscellaneous glass and glazing materials for items typically furnished without glazing and where glazing is not an integral part of the assembly.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Safety Glass Standard: Comply with applicable codes, CPSC 16 CFR 1201, and pass ANSI Z97.1.

2. Fire Rated Glass: Provide glass identical to glass tested per ASTM E163, labeled and listed by UL or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to applicable authorities.

C. Float Glass: Select glazing quality, clear annealed glass, ASTM C1036; nominal thickness 1/4".

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Vitro Architectural Glass (formerly PPG).

Oldcastle Glazing.

Guardian Industries Corp.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Locations: Provide where indicated as clear glass.

D. Tempered Glass: Select glazing quality, clear float glass, fully tempered, ASTM C1048, Kind FT; nominal thickness 1/4"; safety glass.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Vitro Architectural Glass (formerly PPG).

Oldcastle Glazing.

Guardian Industries Corp.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Locations: Provide at doors and at window openings where required by applicable codes and federal requirements.

E. Laminated Glass: ASTM C1172, Kind LA, two sheets of select glazing quality clear float glass laminated with polyvinyl butyral film, safety glass; laminated layers shall be free of air pockets and foreign substances.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Vitro Architectural Glass (formerly PPG).

Oldcastle Glazing.

Guardian Industries Corp.

Global Security Glazing.
08 80 00 - 2 Glazing
TP-381
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
e.
f.

Pulp Studio, Inc.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Glass Thickness: 1/4", unless otherwise indicated.

3. Polyvinyl Butyral Core Thickness: Minimum 30 mil.

4. Location: Provide where indicated.

F. Insulated Glass: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed panes of glass enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space with minus 20-degree F dew point.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Vitro Architectural Glass (formerly PPG).

Oldcastle Glazing.

Guardian Industries Corp. Basis of Design
Viracon.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Performance: Certified to ASTM E2190 by Insulating Glass Certification Council.

3. System: Manufacturer's standard dual seal system compatible with glazing system, and including spacers, desiccant, and standard corner construction.

4. Glass: ASTM C1036, select glazing quality clear float glass; nominal 1/4” thick glass.
a. Basis of Design IGU: Guardian Glass SunGuard SNX 62/27 on Green

5. Safety Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT, fully tempered select glazing quality clear float glass; nominal 1/4” thick glass; provide at doors and impact areas where safety glass is required by applicable codes and regulations.

6. Total Unit Thickness: 1".

7. Locations: Provide at exterior windows and doors unless otherwise indicated.

1. Glazing Materials: Type approved for use in applications indicated for required fire ratings; refer to fire label requirements.

2. Location: Provide at skylights and fire rated not requiring impact resistance.

G. Polycarbonate Mirror:

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.

Bunker Plastics, Inc.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Glazing Materials: Types as recommended by one-way mirror manufacturer. 08 80 00 - 3 Glazing
TP-382
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
H. Spacer Shims: Silicone compatible, 50 durometer hardness; 3" long by 3/32" thick by 1/4" high.

I. Setting Blocks: 70-90 durometer hardness; 4” long by 3/8” thick by 1/4” high standard setting blocks.

J. Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, elastomeric one-component silicone glazing sealants as recommended by sealant manufacturer for application involved.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Dow Corning Corp.

General Electric Co.

Pecora Corp.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Structural and Butt Glazing: Provide high-modulus structural silicone glazing materials recommended by sealant manufacturer for applications where sealant bonds glass to metal system and where sealant bonds glass to glass.

3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of available colors.

K. Glazing Putty: Linseed oil putty, ASTM C570, Type II; oil and resin base caulking compound for building construction; knife grade.1.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.

DAP, Inc.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and framing members to receive glass immediately before glazing; remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrate.

B. Apply primer to joint surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with GANA Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual and glazing manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions.

1. Do not allow glass to touch metal surfaces.

2. Comply with applicable code requirements and NFPA 80 for glass in fire rated openings.

B. Place setting blocks at quarter points in thin course of sealant. 08 80 00 - 4 Glazing
TP-383
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
C. Install removable stops with glass centered in space with spacer shims at 2'-0" intervals on both sides of glass, 1/4" below sightline.

D. Sealant Glazing: Fill gap between glass and stops with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glass but not more than 3/8" below sightline.

1. Apply sealant to uniform and level line, flush with sightline; tool or wipe sealant surface for smooth appearance; at exterior locations tool sealant so water is carried away from glass.

3.3 CLEANING
A. At areas subject to potential impact mark glass after installation by crossed streamers attached to framing and held away from glass; do not apply markers to surface of glass.

B. Remove nonpermanent labels immediately after sealant cures; cure sealants for high early strength and durability.

C. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.

END OF SECTION
08 80 00 - 5 Glazing
TP-384
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 08 83 00

FRAMELESS MIRRORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Typical: Provide frameless glass mirrors with accessories as required for complete installation.

2. Impact Locations: Provide laminated frameless glass mirrors with accessories as required for complete installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 08 80 00: One-way mirrors and polycarbonate mirrors.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Glass Association of North America (GANA): Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish for mirror glass.

B. Samples: Furnish samples of mirror glass with finished edges and corners.

1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranties: Replace mirrors which exhibit signs of desilvering or signs of distortion.

1. Special Warranty Period: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide frameless mirrors with accessories as required for complete installation.

B. Safety Glass Standard: Comply with applicable codes, CPSC 16 CFR 1201, and pass ANSI Z97.1.
08 83 00 - 1 Frameless Mirrors
TP-385
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. Typical Frameless Glass Mirrors: Mirror quality q1 or q2, clear float glass; 1/4" thick; full silver coating, copper coating and organic coating; factory treated and sealed after cutting and finishing.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.

Guardian Glass.

Lenoir Mirror Company, Lenoir, NC.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Edges: Provide edges designed to eliminate cutting potential at edges and corners commonly referred to as arrised edges, as approved by Architect.

D. Laminated Glass Frameless Mirrors: ASTM C1172, Kind LA, two sheets of clear float glass laminated with polyvinyl butyral film, safety glass; laminated layers shall be free of air pockets and foreign substances.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope.

Guardian Industries Corp.

Global Security Glazing.

Pulp Studio, Inc.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Glass: Mirror quality q1 or q2, clear float glass; factory treated and sealed after cutting and finishing.

3. Edges: Provide edges designed to eliminate cutting potential at edges and corners commonly referred to as arrised edges, as approved by Architect.

4. Glass Thickness: Nominal 1/4" total thickness unless otherwise indicated.

5. Polyvinyl Butyral Core Thickness: Minimum 30 mil.

6. Reflective Coating: Coating may be standard full silver reflective metallic coating on Number 2 surface or may be mirror reflective surface on polyvinyl butyral core.

E. Mirror Attachment:

1. Bottom Supports: Brite anodized aluminum angles such as Glass Distributors Inc. (301.779.2430)/Brite Anodized Aluminum 3/8” L-Bar Extrusion, provide felt pads for setting mirrors on angles; provide concealed fasteners.

2. Adhesive: Nontoxic type as recommended by mirror manufacturer. 08 83 00 - 2 Frameless Mirrors
TP-386
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with GANA Glazing Manual and mirror manufacturer instructions.

1. Do not allow glass to touch metal surfaces.

B. Provide ventilation to coating.

C. Set or trim felt to face of mirror.

D. Install ballet barre in accordance with ballet barre manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions without touching mirror.

3.2 CLEANING
A. Remove nonpermanent labels immediately after installation.

B. Remove and replace mirrors which are broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.

END OF SECTION
08 83 00 - 3 Frameless Mirrors
TP-387
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 08 91 00

LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide both extruded aluminum and formed metal (aluminum or galvanized steel) louvers and frames, with screens, attachment hardware, and accessories as required for complete finished installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 08 11 10: Steel door louvers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for each type of louver.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profile of frame, details, relation to adjacent construction, flashing, blade configuration, duct work connection, screens, and percentage of free air opening.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of metal finish.

D. Certificates: Where performance requirements are included, provide AMCA Certified Rating Seal indicating louvers comply with requirements.

1.3 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Take site dimensions affecting louvers prior to fabrication.

B. Ensure openings are properly prepared and flashings are correctly located to divert moisture to exterior.

C. Protect adjacent surfaces, finishes and materials from damage during installation of louvers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The Airolite Corporation.

B. Construction Specialties, Inc. (CSI).

C. Airline Products Co.

D. Nystrom Building Products.

E. Ruskin.
08 91 00 - 1 Louvers
TP-388
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
F. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide metal louvers and frames, with screens, attachment hardware, and accessories.

B. Performance Criteria: Where indicated, comply with specific performance requirements; unit performance ratings determined in compliance with Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) Standard 500.

1. Free Area: Minimum 45% based on 48" by 48" louver.

2. Static Pressure Loss: Maximum 0.15" of water gage at airflow of 1000 fpm free air velocity.

3. Water Penetration: Maximum 0.05 oz/sf of free area at intake airflow of 1000 fpm free area velocity.

4. Wind-Driven Rain: Louvers shall achieve a wind-driven rating in conformance with applicable codes and regulations but not less than an A rating on a standard size louver as defined in AMCA 500 - L.

C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, 6061 or 6063 alloy, T5 or T6 temper; minimum

0.08" thick.

D. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, manufacturer's standard alloy; minimum 0.08" thick.

E. Steel Sheet: Minimum 16 gage steel, ASTM A924 and A653 with G90 galvanized coating, mill phosphatized.

F. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A666 Type 304, with No. 4 finish; minimum 18 gage.

2.1 FABRICATION
A. Louvers: Manufacturer's standard fabrication for types specified and configurations indicated on Drawings.

1. Type: Sheet metal louvers formed of shapes as indicated; Contractor option aluminum sheet or galvanized steel sheet unless otherwise indicated.

2. Type: Extruded aluminum wall louvers, continuous blade (mullionless) type.

3. Type: Extruded aluminum wall louvers, fixed blade mullion type.

B. Bird Screen for Exterior Louvers: Minimum 0.063" diameter wire, 1/2" interwoven square mesh.

1. Wire: Stainless-steel.

2. Frame: Match louver.
08 91 00 - 2 Louvers
TP-389
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. Fabricate louvers to maximum extent possible and disassemble as necessary for shipping and handling limitations; clearly mark units for reassembly and installation.

1. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to suit adjacent construction with tolerances for installation.

2. Fabricate sill extension, flashings, wall anchors, structural supplementary subframing, and accessories as required for complete system; use same materials as provided for louvers.

D. Join frame members and louver blades by welding; maintain equal blade spacing, including separation between blades and frame head and sill; maintain uniform appearance.

1. Shop miter and weld blades into shop fabricated corner units to align with straight sections; include concealed bracing.

E. Shop Finished Louvers: Factory finish with fluoropolymer coating based on Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 and conforming with AAMA 2605; not less than two coat system.

1. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect including metallic color based on mica.

F. Shop Primed Louvers: Manufacturer's standard thermosetting prime coating compatible with paints specified in Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install louvers in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instruction, properly aligned and level.

B. Secure louver rigid with concealed fasteners of non-corrosive metals to suit materials being encountered and to resist anticipated loads.

C. Coordinate installation method with application of adjacent backing and structural elements, and mechanical work.

D. Set and tie into flashings to ensure diversion of moisture to exterior.

E. Hinge screens for access.

END OF SECTION
08 91 00 - 3 Louvers
TP-390
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 09 21 00

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide gypsum board systems including gypsum board, light gage metal framing, suspension system for gypsum board systems, joint treatment, acoustical accessories, and general accessories for complete installation.

1. Provide special surface texture finish coat.

B. Related Sections:

1. 2.

3. 4.

Section 05 40 00: Cold-formed structural metal framing, 18-gage and heavier.

Section 07 21 00: Building thermal insulation.

Section 07 84 00: Firestopping.

Section 09 30 00: Cementitious backer unit tile substrates.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C754: Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water-Resistant Backing Board.

B. ASTM C840: Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design/Build: Provide special engineering for metal framing system to ensure framing heights exceeding manufacturer’s published tables comply with applicable codes and Contract Documents.

B. Coordination, Openings: Obtain dimensions and locations from other trades and provide openings and enclosures for accessories, specialties, equipment, and ductwork.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for framing, insulation, gypsum board, and acoustical accessories.

B. Samples: Submit samples of special texture finish.

C. Manufacturer’s Certification: Furnish manufacturer's certification indicating products comply with Contract Documents and applicable codes.

D. Design/Build Certification: Furnish certification by California licensed engineer indicating compliance with Contract Documents and applicable codes. 09 21 00 - 1 Gypsum Board Assemblies
TP-391
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1. Engineering certification required only where metal framing spans exceed limits included in manufacturer's published tables.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants, and caulks.

B. Level 4 Finish Mock-Up: Provide Level 4 finish mock-up not less than 100 square feet in location acceptable to Architect. Approved mock-up may be incorporated into Project.

C. Level 5 Finish Mock-Up: Provide Level 5 finish mock-up not less than 100 square feet in location acceptable to Architect. Approved mock-up may be incorporated into Project.

D. Special Textured Finish Mock-Up: Provide special texture finish mock-up not less than 100 square feet in location acceptable to Architect. Approved mock-up may be incorporated into Project.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not begin installation of interior gypsum board until space is enclosed, space is not exposed to other sources of water, and space is free of standing water.

B. Maintain areas to receive gypsum board at minimum 50-degree F for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after application until drying of joint compound is complete; comply with ASTM C840.

C. Immediately remove from site gypsum board for interior use exposed to water, including gypsum board with water stains, with signs of mold, and gypsum board with mildew.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. National Gypsum Co.

B. Georgia-Pacific Corp.

C. United States Gypsum Co., USG Corp.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide gypsum board assemblies including gypsum board, light gage metal framing, suspension system for gypsum board systems, joint treatment, acoustical accessories, and general accessories.
09 21 00 - 2 Gypsum Board Assemblies
TP-392
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1. Systems Responsibility: Provide products manufactured by or recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board to maintain single-source responsibility for system.

B. Performance Requirements: Perform gypsum board systems work in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C754 and ASTM C840 unless otherwise specified.

1. Loads: Comply with California Building Code requirements for design of metal framing for gypsum board systems.
a. Deflection: Maximum L/240 typical, L/360 where tile is indicated. b. Deflection: Maximum L/240 typical, L/360 where tile or plaster are indicated.

2. Large Format Tile: Comply with Tile Council of North America (TCNA) requirements for metal framing at maximum 16” on center and for maximum deflection of L/720 where large format tile as defined by TCNA is indicated.

C. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Provide systems listed in applicable code or by Underwriter's Laboratory, Gypsum Association (GA) File No's in GA-600 Fire Resistance Design Manual or other listing approved by applicable authorities.

2. Seismic Requirements: Comply with code requirements for seismic bracing.

D. Framing: Comply with ASTM C754, 20-gage and lighter unless otherwise indicated; provide gages as recommended by manufacturer for spans and loads indicated and as required by applicable codes.

1. Studs: ASTM C645, screw-type Cee-shaped.
a.
b.

Shaft Walls: Cee-T or Cee-H shaped studs.

Area Separation Walls: Match ClarkDietrich/H-Stud, Breakway Clips System.

2. Runners: Match studs.

3. Furring Members: ASTM C645, screw-type, hat-shaped.
a. Sound Rated Assemblies: Provide resilient channels where indicated and where required to provide required sound transmission classifications. 1) Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) USG/RC-1.
b) ClarkDietrich/RC-Deluxe.
c) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

4. Channels: ASTM C754.
09 21 00 - 3 Gypsum Board Assemblies
TP-393
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

5. Hangers: ASTM A641, Class 1 wire not less than sizes in Table No. 5 of ASTM C754 and as required by applicable codes; hanger rods, flat hangers, and angle-type hangers as required.

6. Suspension System: ASTM C635, suspension system composed of main beams and cross furring members interlocking to form supporting network; recommended by gypsum board system manufacturer.

7. Fasteners and Anchorages: As recommended by gypsum board system manufacturer.

E. Gypsum Board: Comply with ASTM C840; maximum permissible lengths; ends square cut, tapered edges on boards to be finished.

1. Mold Resistant Gypsum Board: typical interior.
a.
b.
c.
d.

USG/Sheetrock Mold Tough Firecode Core.

Georgia Pacific/ToughRock Mold-Guard Fireguard X.

National Gypsum/Gold Bond XP Fire-Shield Gypsum Board.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Tile Substrates: Cementitious backer units specified in Section 09 30 00 - Tiling. a. Contractor Option Coated Glass Mat Backer Units: Georgia Pacific/DenShield, UL fire rated as required to maintain integrity of fire rated assemblies.

3. Sheathing: Silicone treated glass mat gypsum sheathing, ASTM C1177, Type X, 5/8” thick unless otherwise indicated.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Georgia Pacific/DensGlass Gold.
2) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

4. Veneer Plaster Base: ASTM C1396, Type X, type recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for gypsum veneer plaster base.
a. Manufacturers:
1) National Gypsum/Kal-Kore Veneer Plaster Base.
2) Georgia Pacific/ToughRock Veneer Plaster Base.
3) USG/Grand Prix Veneer Plaster Base.

5. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C931, Type X; as recommended by manufacturer for exterior non-exposed applications.

6. Extended Exposure Gypsum Board: Fire rated Type X gypsum board designed specifically for extended exposure to moisture during construction; ASTM C1177; provide with score of 10 when tested using ASTM D3273 for mold resistance. a.
b.

National Gypsum/eXP Extended Exposure Sheathing.

Georgia Pacific/DensArmor Plus or DensGlass.
09 21 00 - 4 Gypsum Board Assemblies
TP-394
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
c.
d.

USG/Sheetrock Fiberock Aqua Tough Sheathing.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

7. Fiberglass Mat Faced Gypsum Roof Board:
a.
b.
c.

USG Securock Glass-Mat Roof Board
Georgia-Pacific DensDeck Prime Roof Board
Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

F. Gypsum Board Accessories: Comply with ASTM C840.

1. Provide protective coated steel corner beads and edge trim; type designed to be concealed in finished construction by tape and joint compound.

2. Corner Beads: Manufacturer's standard metal beads.

3. Edge Trim: “J”, "L", "LK", or "LC" casing beads.

4. Reinforcing Tape, Joint Compound, Adhesive, Water, Fasteners: Types recommended by system manufacturer and conforming to ASTM C475. a. Typical Joint Compound: Chemical hardening type for bedding and filling, ready-mixed or powder vinyl type for topping.

5. Control Joints: Back to back casing beads.
a. Back control joints with 4 mil thick polyethylene air seal.

6. Reveals: Extruded aluminum special trim pieces in manufacturer's standard or custom shapes to conform to configurations and dimensions indicated. a. Manufactures:
1) Fry Reglet Corp./Drywall Moldings.
2) Gordon Inc./Final Forms I Drywall Trims.
3) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

G. Acoustical Accessories: Provide as indicated and as required to achieve acoustical ratings indicated.

1. Acoustical Insulation: Preformed mineral fiber, ASTM C665, Type I; friction fit type without integral vapor barrier; as required to meet STC ratings indicated, or of thickness indicated.

Acoustical Sealant: ASTM C919, type recommended for use in conjunction with gypsum board. Paintable, non-shrinking and non-cracking where exposed, nondrying, nonskinning, nonstaining, and nonbleeding where concealed.

2. a. Acoustical Sealant Manufacturers:
1) USG/Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant.
2) Tremco/Acoustical Sealant.
3) Pecora/AC-20.
09 21 00 - 5 Gypsum Board Assemblies
TP-395
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
4) Substitutions: Refer to Division 1.

3. Electrical Box Pads: Provide at outlet, switch and telephone boxes in walls with acoustical insulation.
a. Electrical Box Pad Manufacturers for Non-Fire Rated Partitions:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Harry A. Lowry & Associates (800.772.2521)/Lowry's Electrical Box Pads.

Tremco Sheet Caulking (650.572.1656).

Fire rated partition material manufacturers.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Metal Framing Erection: Erect metal framing in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Install members true to lines and levels to provide surface flatness with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0" in any direction.

2. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs; install runners on each side of opening at frame head height between jamb studs and adjacent studs.

3. Install metal framing backing where required for support of fixtures, cabinets, accessories and hardware.

4. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work which is to be placed in or behind partition framing; allow items to be installed after framing is complete.

B. Ceiling Framing Installation: Erect in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Coordinate location of hangers with other work; provide trapeze supports and steel bracing as required to support ceiling.

2. Install ceiling furring independent of walls, columns, and above-ceiling work.

3. Space main carrying channels at maximum 48" on center, not more than 6" from perimeter walls.
a. Lap splices minimum 12" and secure together 2" from each end of splice.

4. Place furring channels perpendicular to carrying channels at maximum 24" on center and not more than 2" from perimeter walls.

5. Lap splices minimum 8" and secure together 2" from each end of splice. 09 21 00 - 6 Gypsum Board Assemblies
TP-396
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

6. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing; extend bracing minimum 24" past each end of openings.

7. Laterally brace entire suspension system.

C. Gypsum Board Installation: Install in accordance with ASTM C840 and manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to furring and to framing.

2. Erect gypsum board with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. a. Ensure joints of second layer do not occur over joints of first layer in double layer applications.

3. For fire rated systems comply with requirements for fire ratings.

4. Place control joints to be consistent with lines of building spaces and as directed by Architect.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Provide where system abuts structural elements.

Provide at dissimilar materials.

Lengths exceeding 30'-0" in partitions.

Ceiling areas exceeding 50'-0" or 2500 square feet.

Wings of "L", "U" and "T" shaped ceilings.

5. Place corner beads at external corners; use longest practical lengths.

6. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.

7. Tape all edges of above ceiling gypsum board walls

8. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, corners and openings to produce surface ready to receive finishes; feather coats onto adjoining surfaces.

9. Finishing: Comply with Gypsum Association (GA) “Levels of Gypsum Board Finish”. a. GA Level 4 (Typical): Provide three-coat finishing and sanding is required for surfaces indicated to be painted; provide flush, smooth joints and surfaces ready for applied paint finishes.
b. Special Texture Finish Coat: Apply special texture coating over surface indicated to be textured in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; three-coat finishing not required.

10. Remove and replace defective work.
09 21 00 - 7 Gypsum Board Assemblies
TP-397
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
D. Acoustical Accessories Installation:

1. Place acoustical insulation tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.

2. Place acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; install acoustical sealant at gypsum board perimeter at:
a.
b.
c.

Metal Framing: One or two beads.

Base layer and face layer.

Penetrations of partitions.

3. Tolerance: Maximum 1/4" space between gypsum board at floor, ceiling, and penetrations and sealed with acoustical sealant.

4. Install electrical box pads with pads molded and pressed on back and all sides of box, closing openings, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, for complete acoustical barrier.
a. Comply with requirements for HVAC system for air pressure requirements.

END OF SECTION
09 21 00 - 8 Gypsum Board Assemblies
TP-398
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 09 24 00

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Stucco: Provide three-coat Portland cement plaster (stucco) with rainscreen, metal lath, and accessories as required for complete finished system.

2. Base for Surface Bonded Masonry: Provide two-coat Portland cement plaster base for surface bonded thin set veneer systems with metal lath and accessories as required for complete finished system.

B. Related Sections:

1. 2.

3. 4.

Section 07 28 00: Weather barrier underlayment.

Section 09 01 20: Plaster patching.

Section 09 21 00: Metal studs, 20-gage and lighter.

Section 09 90 00: Painting of stucco.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C926: Application of Portland Cement Based Plaster.

B. ASTM C1063: Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement Plaster.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product information for each lathing material and accessory, and for plaster materials.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of control and expansion joints where not shown on Drawings.

C. Samples: Furnish 24” by 24” stucco samples using materials and methods specified including lath.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mock-Ups: Provide not less than 100 sf mock-up of each type of plaster; approved mock-ups may be incorporated into Project.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Take precautionary measures to ensure plaster is not subjected to excessive sun and wind which could cause uneven and excessive evaporation, premature dehydration, or cracking.

B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not apply plaster unless minimum ambient temperature of 40 degrees F has been and continues to be maintained for minimum 48 hours prior to application and until plaster is cured. 09 24 00 - 1 Portland Cement Plaster
TP-399
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide three coat Portland cement plaster (stucco) and two-coat Portland cement plaster base for bonded masonry, with metal lath and accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable codes.

C. Portland Cement Plaster: Provide either ready-mixed materials unless otherwise approved in writing by Architect, complying with ASTM C926.

1. Scratch and Brown Coat Materials:
a.
b.
c.

Cement: Normal Type 1 or 1A Portland cement, ASTM C150.

Hydrated Lime: Special finishing hydrated lime, Type S, ASTM C206.

Aggregate: Natural sand, conforming to ASTM C897 or C144.

2. Brown Coat Water Acrylic Admix: Acrylic polymer specifically manufactured for use in Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) applications and which will not detrimentally affect finish.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Larsen Products Corp/Acrylic Admix 101.
2) BASF/Thoro Acryl 60.
3) Chem-Masters Corp/Cretelox.
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

3. Finishing Materials: Same as brown coat with acrylic admix with integral color and white cement. Factory premix finish coat is acceptable. a. Provide white cement from a single manufacturer and clear silica sand at applications indicated to have integral color.
b. Integral Color: Pure, non-fading, mineral oxide color conforming to ASTM C979 and designed and mixed to provide uniform color finish coat. 1) Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

4. Proprietary Finishing Materials: Provide proprietary Portland cement-based factory mixed integral color finishing materials as indicated and as approved by Architect.
a. Manufacturers:
1)
2)
3)
La Habra Products, Inc.

Merlex Stucco, Inc.

Omega Products Corp.: Basis of Design Akroflex Semi Smooth Finish
09 24 00 - 2 Portland Cement Plaster
TP-400
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
b. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

5. Proprietary Finishing Materials: Provide proprietary acrylic based factory mixed integral color finishing materials as indicated and as approved by Architect. a. Manufacturers:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Dryvit Systems/Textured Acrylic Finish.

Omega Products Corp./Akroflex Semi Smooth Finish (Basis of Design) La Habra Products, Inc./DPR Acrylic Finish.

Senergy, Inc./Acrylic Finish.

Sto Corp./Stolit.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
b. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

6. Water: Clean, fresh and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic matter or other deleterious substances.

7. Bonding Agent: Conform to ASTM C932.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Larsen Products Corp./Weld-Crete.
2) BASF/Thorobond.
3) Chem-Masters Corp./Polyweld.
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

B. Metal Components: Comply with requirements of ASTM C1063.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Phillips Manufacturing Company
Alabama Metal Industries Corp (AMICO).

ClarkDietrich Building Systems.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Exterior Components: Hot-dip galvanized finish; ASTM A924 and A653 minimum G90 for 18 gage and lighter formed metal products, ASTM A123 galvanized after fabrication for 16 gage and heavier products.
a. Exposed Exterior Components: Zinc accessories unless fully concealed in plaster.
09 24 00 - 3 Portland Cement Plaster
TP-401
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3. Suspension System: Size to comply with referenced standards. a. Main Runners: Hot or cold-rolled steel.
1) Main Carrying Channels: Minimum 16 gage, 1-1/2" by 1/2". 2) Furring Channels: Minimum 16 gage, 3/4" by 1/2".
b. Hangers: Size and type to suit application and to rigidly secure system in place, with maximum deflection of L/360.
1) Hanger Wire: ASTM A641, Class 1 galvanized.
2) Hanger Rods and Flats: Mild steel.
c. Lateral Bracing: Minimum 16 gage cold-rolled steel.
d. Anchorage and Fastening: Approved devices of type and size to suit application and to rigidly secure suspension system.

4. Exterior Metal Lath: Galvanized expanded diamond mesh; minimum 2.5 psy at vertical applications, 3.4 psy at horizontal applications. a. Backing: Weather resistive barrier system specified in Section 07 28 00 – Weather Barrier/Underlayment.
b. Self-Furring: Where over solid substrate, provide “V” groove type to hold lath approximately 1/4" from supporting base.
c. Tie Wire: ASTM A641, soft temper, Class 1 zinc coated; minimum 16 gage for tying metal lath to furring channels and metal lath to metal lath.

5. Inside Corner Mesh: Minimum 26-gage steel; perforated or expanded flanges or clips shaped to permit complete embedding in plaster; minimum 2" by 2" size.

C. Accessories: Provide as indicated, as recommended by referenced standards, and as required for complete installation.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Keene Products from Metalex, a Division of The Koller Group.

Delta Star, Inc., Superior Metal Trim.

Brand X Metals.

Lath manufacturers.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Casing Beads and Base Screeds: Minimum 26-gage, square edges at casing beads, drip type base screeds; provide with expanded flanges.

3. Expansion Joints: Two-piece slip type joints; commonly referred to as No. 40.

4. Control Joints: One-piece metal joint designed to interlock with plaster similar to Keene/XJ15-3.
09 24 00 - 4 Portland Cement Plaster
TP-402
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

5. Aluminum Vent Strips and Channel Screeds: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063 and temper T5 or T6, minimum 0.05" thick; with manufacturer's standard baked-on finish. a. Manufacturers:
1) Fry Reglet Corp./Plaster Moldings.
2) Gordon Inc./Final Forms II.
3) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
b. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

D. Anchorages: Tie wire, nails, screws and other approved metal supports, of type and size to suit application.

1. Staples not permitted.

2.2 PLASTER MIXES
A. Provide plaster mixes in accordance with ASTM C926 as appropriate to the substrate indicated and the approved samples.

B. Mix only as much plaster as can be used in one hour.

C. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.

D. Protect mixes from frost, dust and evaporation.

E. Do not retemper mixes after initial set has occurred.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate suspended work with structural work to ensure inserts and structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive hangers.

1. Coordinate location of hangers with other work.

B. Prior to application ensure mechanical and electrical services behind surfaces to receive cement plaster have been tested and approved.

C. Ensure framing has been properly installed and rigidly secured.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Erect furring and lath in accordance with ASTM C1063.

B. Install work true to lines and levels and to provide surface flatness with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0" in any direction.
09 24 00 - 5 Portland Cement Plaster
TP-403
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. Isolation: Isolate lathing and metal support system where it abuts building structure horizontally, and where partition/wall work abuts overhead structure, to prevent transfer of building loads into plaster.

1. Install slip or cushion type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support.

D. Frame both sides of expansion joints independently unless otherwise indicated, do not bridge joints with furring and lathing or accessories.

E. Fixture Support Framing: Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing where work is indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services and similar work requiring attachment and support.

F. Coordinate installation of anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work which is to be placed in or behind framing; allow such items to be installed after framing is complete.

Install expansion and control joints so plaster areas do not exceed 120 ft2, and with area sides having a maximum one to two and a half (1:2-1/2) ratio, unless otherwise approved by Architect.

G.

H. Suspension System: Install to heights indicated on Drawings.

1. Install independent of walls, columns and overhead work.

2. Use hangers spaced maximum 4'-0" on center.

3. Space main carrying channels maximum 4'-0" on center and not more than 6" from perimeter walls; lap splices minimum 12" and secure together 2" from each end of splice.

4. Securely fix carrying channels to hangers to prevent turning or twisting and to develop full strength of hangers.

5. Place furring channels perpendicular to carrying channels, not more than 2" from perimeter walls; rigidly secure to carrying channels.

6. Lap splices minimum 8" and secure together 1" from each end of splice.

7. Reinforce openings in suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing; extend bracing minimum 24" past openings.

8. Laterally brace suspension system as required to resist seismic loads, including uplift.

I. Metal Lathing: Apply lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports; secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports; lap ends minimum 1" and sides 1/2”; secure with tie wires.

1. Continuously reinforce internal angles.
09 24 00 - 6 Portland Cement Plaster
TP-404
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Place 6" wide x 12" long strips of metal lath diagonally at corners of openings; secure rigidly in place.

3. Place 6" wide strips of metal lath at junctions of dissimilar materials; place parallel with dissimilar materials; secure rigidly in place.

J. Installation of Metal Accessories:

1. Fasten in place true to line and in correct relation to adjacent materials and as required to prevent dislodging and misalignment by subsequent operations.

2. Fasten at both ends and at maximum 12" on center along sides.

3. 4.

Bring grounding edge of accessories to true lines, plumb, level, and straight.

Install accessories to provide required depth of plaster and to bring plaster surface to required plane.

5. 6.

Install continuous corner reinforcement for full length of external corners.

Install sill and drip screeds with paper sheathing and lath installed over attachment flange of screeds.

Beads: Use single length of metal beads wherever length of run does not exceed longest standard stock length available; miter or cope corners.

7. a. Provide casing beads where plaster abuts dissimilar construction and at perimeter of openings where edges of plaster will not be concealed by other work.

K. Portland Cement Plaster: Conform to ASTM C926.

1. Stucco: Apply three coat cement plaster system, scratch, brown, and finish coats.

2. Base for Surface Bonded Masonry: Apply two coat cement plaster system, scratch and brown coats.

Apply each base coat (scratch and brown) to minimum thickness of 3/8"; allow each coat to moist cure for minimum period of 48 hours;

3. a. Moist cure first base coat (scratch coat) during 48-hour period.

4. 5.

Allow base coats to cure for minimum 7 days prior to application of finish coat.

Evenly dampen base coat, to ensure uniform suction, and apply finish coat; apply thickness sufficient to secure required texture but in no case less than 1/8". a. Apply pre-mixed finish coat in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

6. Maintain surface flatness, with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0".

7. Avoid excessive working of surface, delay troweling to avoid drawing excess fines to surface.

L. Finish: Provide surfaces with finish to match approved sample panel and mock-up. 09 24 00 - 7 Portland Cement Plaster
TP-405
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, patch, point, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections.

B. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing, check cracking, dryouts, efflorescence, sweat-outs, and similar defects.

C. Finish cutting and patching to match undamaged plaster; patching shall not be visible in finished installation.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Promptly remove plaster from surfaces not indicated to be plastered.

B. Repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during plastering.

END OF SECTION
09 24 00 - 8 Portland Cement Plaster
TP-406
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 09 30 00
TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide tile installations with accessories, as required for complete installation.

1. 2.

Provide waterproofing membrane integral with tile setting beds.

Provide cementitious backer unit tile substrate.

B. Related Sections:

1. 2.

Section 09 21 00: Metal framing and gypsum board.

Section 09 30 90: Exterior large format tiling.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A108.1: Installation of Tile with Portland Cement Mortar.

B. ANSI A108.5: Installation of Tile with Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.

C. ANSI A108.6: Installation of Tile with Chemical Resistant Water Cleanable Tile Setting and Grouting Epoxy.

D. ANSI A108.10: Installation of Grout in Tilework.

E. ANSI A108.11: Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units.

F. Tile Council of North America (TCNA): Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination, Large Format Tile and Framing: Tile Council of North America (TCNA) requires framing at large format tile to be maximum 16” on center and for maximum deflection of L/720 where large format tile as defined by TCNA is indicated.

1. Coordinate with framing installation to ensure proper stud spacing and deflection limits are provided at locations where large format tile is indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for each type of material for Project.

B. Samples: Furnish each type of tile clearly indicating pattern, coloration and joints.

1. Color Charts: Submit actual tile sections showing full range of colors, textures and patterns available for each type of tile.
09 30 00 - 1 Tiling
TP-407
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Prepare two 12" square sample panels of each selected type of tile and grout.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants, and caulks.

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Provide heat and ventilation in areas where ceramic tile work is being performed, to allow tile to properly set.

B. Take precautionary measures necessary to ensure excessive temperature changes do not occur.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of system to resist water penetration except where failure is result of structural failure of building. Repair system and pay for or replace damaged materials and surfaces.

1. Hairline cracking due to temperature or shrinkage is not considered structural failure.

2. Period: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide tile installations with tile, grout, setting materials, and accessories as indicated.

B. Regulatory Requirements, Slip-Resistance:

1. Slip-Resistant Hard Surfaces: Hard surface finishes to comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for slip-resistant hard surfaces, including general code requirements and requirements for access for persons with disabilities.

C. Tile: Types as indicated which could include ceramic, ceramic mosaic, quarry, paver, porcelain, stone, and glass type tiles.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Dal-Tile Corp. Basis of Design
Crossville Tile.

Summitville Tiles, Inc.

Manufacturers listed on Finish Schedule.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
09 30 00 - 2 Tiling
TP-408
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Color, Style and Pattern: As indicated on Finish Schedule, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of types of tiles indicated where not otherwise indicated
a. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

3. Base and Trim: Provide matching trim pieces, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile as directed by Architect; types as indicated, as selected by Architect where not indicated.

D. Portland Cement Setting Bed: Portland cement bed conforming to ANSI A108.1 and TCNA recommendations including separator sheet and reinforcing mesh.

1. Separator sheet may be deleted where over waterproof membrane.

2. Separator sheet may be deleted where over waterproof membrane or shower pan.

E. Latex Thin Set: Thinset bond coat, consisting of latex-cementitious mortar conforming to ANSI A118.4.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Laticrete International Inc.

Bostik Construction Products/Hydroment.

Custom Building Products.

Mapei Corp.

Parex USA/Mer-Krete.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

F. Latex-Cement Grout: ANSI A118.7, latex-cementitious type, uniform in color, resistant to shrinkage.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Laticrete International Inc.

Bostik Construction Products/Hydroment.

Custom Building Products.

Mapei Corp.

Parex USA/Mer-Krete.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

G. Waterproofing and Crack Isolation Membrane: Manufacturer's standard liquid rubber polymer designed specifically for application under tile in non-immersed applications.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.

Laticrete International Inc./9235 Waterproof Membrane.

Bostik Construction Products/Hydroment Ultra-Set.
09 30 00 - 3 Tiling
TP-409
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
c.
d.
e.
f.

Custom Building Products/RedGard Membrane.

Mapei Corp/Mapelastic Aqua Defense.

Parex USA/Mer-Krete Hydro-Guard 2000.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

H. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 aggregated Portland cement with woven glass-fiber mesh on both faces; approximately 1/2" thick; UL fire rated as required to maintain integrity of fire rated assemblies.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.

USG Industries, Durabond Division/Durock.

National Gypsum Co./PermaBase Cement Board.

Custom Building Products/Wonderboard.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Contractor Option Coated Glass Mat Backer Units: Georgia Pacific/DenShield, UL fire rated as required to maintain integrity of fire rated assemblies.

I. Cleaning and Sealing Materials: As recommended by tile and grout manufacturers, such as Bostik Construction Products/Hydroment CeramaSeal.

J. Floor Sealer (Under Epoxy Set Floors over Concrete): Curing hardener sealer vapor retarder to prevent bond failure of flooring systems, type as recommended by epoxy setting bed material manufacturer for specific applications indicated.

A. Special Tile Trim Pieces: Provide as indicated on Drawings.

1. Manufacturers:
a.
b.

Schluter Systems L.P.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MIXES
A. Mix and proportion cementitious materials for site-made leveling coats, setting beds and grout as recommended by the TCNA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.

B. Mix and proportion pre-mixed setting beds and grout materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prior to installing tile, ensure surfaces are level; comply with TCNA and tile manufacturer recommendations but not greater than following.

1. Bed Set Tile Tolerance: Maximum surface variation of 1/4" in 10'-0".

2. Thin Set Tile Tolerance: Maximum surface variation of 1/8" in 10'-0". 09 30 00 - 4 Tiling
TP-410
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Ensure surfaces are clean and well cured.

1. Drains: Where indicated, ensure surfaces are properly sloped to drains.

C. Do not commence work until surface conditions are within tolerances required for proper installation; apply latex leveling material where necessary to meet required tolerances.

D. Waterproof and Crack Isolation Membrane: Install waterproof membrane at tile areas located above grade, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; extend membrane minimum 6" up walls.

1. Comply with waterproof membrane manufacturer recommendations for installation of tile over waterproof membrane.

E. Showers: Install shower pan liners and wall waterproofing at showers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; extend pan liners minimum 6" up walls, waterproofing full height at showers.

1. Comply with manufacturer recommendations for installation of tile over shower pan liner and waterproof membrane.

F. Backer Units: Install units in accordance with ANSI A108.11, manufacturer's recommendations, and as required to provide fire ratings indicated on Drawings.

G. Floor Sealer: Apply vapor retarding floor sealer on concrete floors indicated to receive epoxy set tile in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install tile in accordance with referenced ANSI Standards and TCNA recommendations for type of substrate and indicated setting method.

1. Complexity of TCNA variations in types of tile installation systems and potential for changes to surrounding conditions during design and construction makes exact listing of potential conditions improbable.

2. Contractor, installers, and manufacturer representatives shall inform Architect where actual conditions are not covered and where providing similar materials and systems do not comply with TCNA or manufacturer recommendations. a. Where specified or similar materials and systems do not comply with TCNA or manufacturer recommendations submit proposed substitutions along with statement substitutions are of comparable quality to specified materials.

B. Following systems shall form the basis of tile installation systems required for Project.

Where Project conditions vary from TCNA and manufacturer recommendations, notify Architect immediately. Where different use similar materials and systems as appropriate.

1. Bed Set Floors over Concrete: TCNA F111, with latex cement bond coat. 09 30 00 - 5 Tiling
TP-411
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Bed Set Floors over Waterproof and Crack Isolation Membrane over Concrete: TCNA F121, with latex cement bond coat.

3. Bed Set Floors over Waterproof and Crack Isolation Membrane over Wood: TCNA F141, with latex cement bond coat.

4. Latex-Cement Thin Set Floors over Concrete: TCNA F113.

5. Latex-Cement Thin Set Floors over Waterproof and Crack Isolation Membrane:

TCNA F122.

6. Latex-Cement Thin Set Wall Tile over Cementitious Backer Units: TCNA W244.

7. Latex-Cement Thin Set Wall Tile over Coated Glass Mat Backer Units: TCNA W245.

8. Showers: TCNA B415 latex bond coat over reinforced mortar bed floor with latex cement thin set over cementitious backer unit walls, with shower pan liners and waterproofing at walls.

C. Place tile in accordance with patterns indicated on Drawings or as directed by Architect; carefully plan tile layouts, ensure pattern is uninterrupted from one surface to the next and through doorways.

1. Apply latex thin set to back of tile where necessary to ensure 100% bond between bond coat and substrate; replace tiles which break due to voids between tile and substrate.

D. Place stone thresholds level and true to line; in correct alignment with tile, doors and partitions.

E. Neatly cut tile around fixtures and drains; accurately form corners, base, intersections and returns.

1. Base, Coves: Flush cove type with base grout joint on wall, cove tile on floor, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Corners and Edges: Bullnose tile unless otherwise indicated.

F. Locate expansion joints, control joints, contraction joints, and isolation joints where indicated; where not indicated, provide as recommended by TCNA Handbook and as approved by Architect.

1. Install special trim pieces as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions, true to lines and levels indicated and in correct relationship with tile and adjacent materials.

G. Ensure tile joints are uniform in width, subject to normal variance in tolerance allowed in tile size; ensure joints are watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar or grout.

H. Sound tile after setting, remove and replace hollow sounding units.

I. Allow tile to set for a minimum 48 hours prior to grouting. 09 30 00 - 6 Tiling
TP-412
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
J. Grout tile to comply with recommendations of TCNA and as specified.

K. Leave completed installation free of broken, damaged and faulty tile.

3.2 CLEANING AND SEALING
A. Clean tile surfaces free of foreign matter upon completion of grouting.

B. Seal tile and grout surfaces where recommended by manufacturer for materials and applications involved; comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

END OF SECTION
09 30 00 - 7 Tiling
TP-413
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 09 51 00

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide suspended acoustical ceiling system with exposed suspended metal grid system, trim, and accessories as required for complete finished installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. 2.

Section 09 21 00: Gypsum board suspended ceiling systems.

Divisions 21 through 28: Facilities services for ceiling penetrations.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C635: Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.

B. ASTM C636: Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.

C. ASTM E580: Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and LayIn Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Coordinate installation of acoustical ceiling systems with items installed above ceilings to ensure work above ceilings is complete, ceiling space allows for concealed items while allowing required ceiling heights, and building is enclosed.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturers' literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work and ceiling finishes, and inter-relation of mechanical and electrical items related to system.

C. Samples: Furnish 3 samples of tile.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years successful experience in projects of similar type and scope; acceptable to manufacturer of integrated acoustical ceiling system.
09 51 00 - 1 Acoustical Ceilings
TP-414
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not install ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated and overhead mechanical work is completed, tested and approved.

1. Do not allow acoustical ceiling units to be exposed to moisture; immediately remove acoustical ceiling units with stains, units with signs of mold, and units with mildew.

B. Allow wet work to dry prior to commencement of installation.

C. Maintain uniform temperatures of minimum 60 degrees F and humidity of 20% to 40% prior to, during and after installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

B. CertainTeed.

C. USG Corporation.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide acoustical ceiling systems with exposed suspended metal grid system, trim, and accessories as required for complete finished installation.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Seismic Design Requirements: Comply with California Building Code requirements for seismic bracing of ceiling suspension system, and with ASTM E580.
a. Ceiling Struts: Provide struts as detailed on Drawings and as required by code, placed maximum 12'-0" on center in both directions and within 6'-0" of each wall.
b. Slack Wires: Provide safety slack wires, two per fluorescent fixture on diagonally opposite corners and a single wire for each recessed down light.

2. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or other independent testing laboratory acceptable to applicable authorities.
a. Flame Spread/Smoke Density: Provide products meeting code requirements for maximum 25 flame spread and maximum 450 smoke developed. 09 51 00 - 2 Acoustical Ceilings
TP-415
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. Suspension Systems: Comply with ASTM C635, as applicable to type of suspension system required for type of ceiling units indicated.

1. Grid System:
a. Exposed Grid System: Narrow 9/16" nominal face width, direct hung, aluminum or steel "T" exposed grid system.

2. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C635, Table 1, Direct Hung.

3. Hanger Wires: Galvanized carbon steel, ASTM A641, soft temper, pre-stretched, yield-stress load of at least three times design load, but not less than 12-gage.

4. Straps, Tubes and Angles: Provide galvanized steel as required to meet state and local requirements for seismic design loads.

5. Structural Class: Minimum intermediate-duty system.

6. Edge Molding: Manufacturer's standard angle molding for edges and penetrations of ceiling, with single flange of molding exposed.

7. Finish of Exposed Items: Manufacturer's standard white baked enamel.

8. Maximum Allowable Deflection: L/360.

D. Acoustical Panels: ASTM E1264 type and form as indicated on Finish Schedule, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of panels where not otherwise indicated.

1. Panels: Mineral composition lay-in ceiling panels with reveal edge designed to be compatible with specified suspension system.

2. Texture: Light fissured panels unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

3. Basis of Design: USG MARS Tile Panels, square edge

4. Size: 2'-0" by 2'-0", except where otherwise indicated on Drawings.

5. Colors: white
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Furnish layouts for inserts, clips and other supports required to be installed by other trades for support of acoustical ceilings.

1. Install inserts, clips, and supports where not previously installed and where additional supports are required for complete installation. 09 51 00 - 3 Acoustical Ceilings
TP-416
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Measure ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling; do not use less than half width units at borders.

C. Coordinate with other work supported by or penetrating through ceilings, including integral air handling systems, light fixtures, and other systems.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical ceiling systems in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM C636.

1. Coordinate installation of air handling systems and electrical systems integral with integrated acoustic ceiling systems.

2. Finished Ceilings: True to lines and levels and free from warped, soiled or damaged grid or acoustical units.

B. Install ceiling systems in a manner capable of supporting superimposed loads, with maximum permissible deflection of 1/8" in 10'-0".

C. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete; coordinate location of hangers with other work.

1. Ensure suspension system is located to accommodate fittings and units of equipment which is to be placed after installation of ceiling grid.

D. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest adjacent hangers and related carrying channels as required to span required distance.

E. Install ceiling suspension system to resist seismic loads as required by state and local codes, including extra hanger wires and compression supports for ceilings and light fixtures.

F. Hang system independently of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where suspension system members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of the longitudinal axis or face plane of adjacent members.

G. Do not support lighting fixtures from or on main runners or cross runners if weight of fixture causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability.

1. Support fixture loads independently or provide supplementary hangers located within 6" of each corner.

H. Do not install fixtures so main runners and cross runners are eccentrically loaded; where fixture installation would produce rotation of runners, provide stabilizer bars.

I. Install edge moldings at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using maximum lengths, straight, true to line and level; miter corners.

1. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other ceiling finishes. 09 51 00 - 4 Acoustical Ceilings
TP-417
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
J. Where required form expansion joints to accommodate movement and maintain visual closure without distorting system.

K. Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or defects detrimental to appearance and function.

1. Lay directionally patterned units one way with pattern as directed.

2. Fit border units neatly against abutting surfaces.

L. Install system level, in uniform plane and free from twist, warp and dents.

M. Install hold-down clips where required by applicable codes and where ceiling is within 20'-0" of an exterior door.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjustment: Adjust sags or twists which develop in ceiling system and replace any part which is damaged or faulty.

END OF SECTION
09 51 00 - 5 Acoustical Ceilings
TP-418
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 09 65 10

RESILIENT BASE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide resilient base and accessories as required for complete finished installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 09 65 20: Resilient Plank Flooring

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's product literature.

B. Samples: Furnish samples of each base color and type.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives and resilient flooring.

1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Comply with manufacturer recommendations for site conditions but not less than following; maintain minimum 70-degree F air temperature at installation area for three days prior to, during, and for 24 hours after installation.

B. Store materials in area of application; allow three days for material to reach same temperature as area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Johnsonite, Inc.

B. Burke Flooring, Division of Burke Industries.

C. Roppe Rubber Corporation.

D. Flexco Co.

E. Allstate Rubber Corp.

F. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
09 65 10 - 1 Resilient Base
TP-419
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide resilient base and accessories as required for complete finished installation.

B. Performance Requirements: Provide materials tested under ASTM E648, Flooring Radiant Panel Test, with results of 0.45 watts/sq. cm or higher.

C. Resilient Base: Conform to ASTM F1861, with premolded end stops and external corners; 1/8" gage; provide coved base at hard floor surfaces.

1. Type: Extruded rubber, in rolls.

2. Type: Vinyl base.

3. Height: 4" unless otherwise indicated.

4. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

D. Primers and Adhesives: Water-resistant nontoxic types recommended by base manufacturer for specified material and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Apply to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

1. Fit base joints tight and vertical.

2. Maintain minimum measurement of 18" between joints.

B. Miter internal corners; use molded sections for external corners and exposed ends.

C. Install base on solid backing, adhere tightly to wall and floor surfaces; fill voids along top edge of base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler.

D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions.

E. Install straight and level to variation of plus or minus 1/8" over 10'-0".

3.2 CLEAN-UP
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces without causing damage.

B. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

END OF SECTION
09 65 10 - 2 Resilient Base
TP-420
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 09 65 20

RESILIENT PLANK FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide resilient tile flooring and accessories as required for complete finished installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 09 65 10: Resilient Base

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's product literature.

B. Samples: Furnish 3 samples of each type of flooring color and pattern.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives and resilient flooring.

1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Ensure floor surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0".

B. Ensure concrete floors are dry and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonizing, and dusting.

C. Maintain minimum 70-degree F air temperature at flooring installation area for three days prior to, during, and for 24 hours after installation.

D. Store flooring materials in area of application; allow three days for material to reach same temperature as area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Millikan Fortified Foundations, PIK176 – 121 Bark

1. Installation per manufacturer’s specifications and written recommendations Note: Location, extent and pattern installation method as indicated.

B. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
09 65 20 - 1 Resilient Tile Flooring
TP-421
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide resilient plank flooring and accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements, Flammability: Provide materials tested under ASTM E648, Flooring Radiant Panel Test, with results of 0.45 watts/sq cm or higher.

C. Regulatory Requirements, Slip-Resistance:

1. Slip-Resistant Hard Surfaces: Hard surface finishes to comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for slip-resistant hard surfaces, including general code requirements and requirements for access for persons with disabilities.

2. As indicated in finish schedule.

D. Edge Strips: Homogeneous vinyl or rubber, tapered or bullnose edge, color as selected by Architect.

E. Sub-Floor Filler: White premixed latex-cement paste designed for providing thin solid surface for leveling and minor ramping of subsurface to adjacent floor finishes.

1. Use material capable of being applied and feathered out to adjacent floor without spalling.

F. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof nontoxic types as recommended by flooring manufacturer for specified material and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for preparation and to ASTM F710.

B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps; fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and defects with sub-floor filler.

C. Clean floor and apply, trowel and float filler to leave smooth, flat hard surface; prohibit traffic until filler is cured.

D. Test substrate for moisture content in accordance with flooring manufacturer recommendations; where moisture content exceeds recommendations take measures recommended by flooring manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions.

1. Open floor tile cartons, enough to cover each area, and mix tile to ensure shade variations do not occur within any one area.

B. Lay flooring with joints parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical pattern. 09 65 20 - 2 Resilient Tile Flooring
TP-422
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. Install minimum 1/2 plank at room and area perimeter.

D. Terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar.

E. Install edge strips at unprotected and exposed edges.

F. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, floor outlets and other appurtenances, to produce tight joints.

G. Consult with Architect for floor pattern desired in each area.

H. Edge Strips: Install where edge of tile would otherwise be exposed; butt to flooring without gaps; set in adhesive.

3.3 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces without causing damage.

B. Clean floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Prohibit traffic from floor for 48 hours after installation.

END OF SECTION
09 65 20 - 3 Resilient Tile Flooring
TP-423
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 09 65 20

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide resilient tile flooring and accessories as required for complete finished installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 09 65 10: Resilient base.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's product literature.

B. Samples: Furnish samples of each type of flooring color and pattern.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives and resilient flooring.

1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Ensure floor surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0".

B. Ensure concrete floors are dry and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonizing, and dusting.

C. Maintain minimum 70-degree F air temperature at flooring installation area for three days prior to, during, and for 24 hours after installation.

D. Store flooring materials in area of application; allow three days for material to reach same temperature as area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Congoleum Corp.

B. Johnsonite
C. Tarkett Inc/Azrock.

D. Armstrong World Industries.

E. Tarkett Inc./Azrock.
09 65 20 - 1 Resilient Tile Flooring
TP-424
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
F. Flexco Flooring.

G. Burke Mercer.

H. Flexco Flooring.

I. Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc. (NORA).

J. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide resilient tile flooring and accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements, Flammability: Provide materials tested under ASTM E648, Flooring Radiant Panel Test, with results of 0.45 watts/sq cm or higher.

C. Regulatory Requirements, Slip-Resistance:

1. Slip-Resistant Hard Surfaces: Hard surface finishes to comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for slip-resistant hard surfaces, including general code requirements and requirements for access for persons with disabilities.

D. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): 12" by 12" by 1/8" thick; vinyl composition tile conforming to ASTM F1066, Composition 1.

1. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

E. Vinyl Composition Tile VCT: Static Dissipative: Use at computer room.

F. Edge Strips: Homogeneous vinyl or rubber, tapered or bullnose edge, color as selected by Architect.

G. Sub-Floor Filler: White premixed latex-cement paste designed for providing thin solid surface for leveling and minor ramping of subsurface to adjacent floor finishes.

1. Use material capable of being applied and feathered out to adjacent floor without spalling.

H. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof nontoxic types as recommended by flooring manufacturer for specified material and application.

I. Sealer and Wax: Type recommended by flooring manufacturer for material type and location.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for preparation and to ASTM F710. 09 65 20 - 2 Resilient Tile Flooring
TP-425
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps; fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and defects with sub-floor filler.

C. Clean floor and apply, trowel and float filler to leave smooth, flat hard surface; prohibit traffic until filler is cured.

D. Test substrate for moisture content in accordance with flooring manufacturer recommendations; where moisture content exceeds recommendations take measures recommended by flooring manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions.

1. Open floor tile cartons, enough to cover each area, and mix tile to ensure shade variations do not occur within any one area.

B. Spread cement evenly in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure adhesion over entire area of installation; spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of flooring before initial set.

C. Set flooring in place using methods to ensure full adhesion.

D. Lay flooring with joints parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical pattern.

E. Install minimum 1/2 tile at room and area perimeter.

F. Terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar.

G. Install edge strips at unprotected and exposed edges.

H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, floor outlets and other appurtenances, to produce tight joints.

I. Edge Strips: Install where edge of tile would otherwise be exposed; butt to flooring without gaps; set in adhesive.

3.3 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces without causing damage.

B. Clean, seal and wax floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Prohibit traffic from floor for 48 hours after installation.

END OF SECTION
09 65 20 - 3 Resilient Tile Flooring
TP-426
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 09 67 55

URETHANE FOOD PREPARATION FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide urethane slurry flooring, including integral coved base and accessories as required for complete finished installation acceptable by USDA and applicable health authorities for use in food preparation areas.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing work of this Section. Require attendance of those directly affecting work of this Section.

1. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature and maintenance instructions.

B.

C.

Samples: Submit membrane applied to 1/4" plywood, or similar backing.

Certifications:

1. 2.

Project List: List minimum five projects of similar nature installed by applicator.

Installer Acceptance: Submit manufacturer's certification installer is acceptable for this Project.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for coatings.

B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of five years successful experience in application of flooring systems of type specified and acceptable to manufacturer of flooring system.

C. Supervision: Manufacturer's representative shall supervise installation of system.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original manufacturer's sealed containers, identified with material name, date of manufacture and lot number.

B. Store materials to prevent damage to containers; immediately remove damaged and unsuitable materials.
09 67 55 - 1 Urethane Food Preparation Flooring
TP-427
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Slab Temperature: Minimum 40 degrees F at time of installation and at least 5 degrees F above dew point during installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. The StonHard Group/StonHard.

B. Sherwin-Williams General Polymers/FasTop.

C. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide urethane slurry food preparation flooring, including integral cover base and accessories as required for complete finished installation acceptable by USDA and applicable health authorities for use in food preparation areas.

B. Regulatory Requirements - Volatile Organic Compounds: Provide materials conforming to applicable air quality management district limitations on volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.

C. Regulatory Requirements - Slip Resistance: Provide non-slip units complying with California Building Code and ADA Standards requirements for slip resistance.

1. Slip-Resistant Hard Surfaces: Hard surface finishes to comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for slip-resistant hard surfaces, including general code requirements and requirements for access for persons with disabilities.

D. Urethane Slurry Flooring: Manufacturer's chemical resistant resin system specified and as recommended by manufacturer for food preparation areas and approved by authorities having jurisdiction for food prep areas.

1. Basis of Design: Sherwin Williams FasTop
a. Specific System: As recommended by system manufacturer for applications indicated; provide special thermal shock resistant and thermal cycling resistance at locations as required by specific food service equipment.

2. Application: Comply with manufacturer recommendations but not less than following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Cove Base: Urethane primer, cover base binder resin, cove base aggregate.

Slurry: Binder resin and aggregate.

Broadcast: Dry Silica Sand (30 mesh and larger) broadcast into excess.

Seal Coat.

Thickness: As recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.

3. Colors: provide custom color as indicated.
09 67 55 - 2 Urethane Food Preparation Flooring
TP-428
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
E. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended primer complying with California limitations on volatile organic compounds as applicable.

F. Subfloor Filler: White premixed latex-cement paste designed for providing thin solid surface for leveling and minor ramping of subsurface to adjacent floor finishes.

1. Use material capable of being applied and feathered out to adjacent floor without spalling.

B. Vapor Retarding Floor Sealer for Concrete Substrates: Type as recommended by decorative epoxy flooring manufacturer.

G. Accessories: Provide as recommended by system manufacturer for applications indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to installing flooring, ensure surfaces are level, with maximum surface variation of 1/4" in 10'-0".

B. Ensure surfaces are clean and well cured.

C. Do not commence work until surface conditions are within tolerances required for proper installation.

D. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean concrete slab free from foreign matter.

B. Apply vapor retarding floor sealer in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions for application and quantities of materials.

1. Mix and apply flooring materials in accordance with directions, minimum two coat system, two coats plus primer where recommended by manufacturer.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Use clean water and stiff bristle fiber brushes to clean decorative epoxy flooring.

B. Do not use wire brushes, acid type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage. 09 67 55 - 3 Urethane Food Preparation Flooring
TP-429
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect completed floor surface as required from stains and damage by covering with reinforced construction paper or covering recommended by flooring manufacturer.

B. Protect walls and surfaces of finished work of others against damage or soiling resulting from flooring work.

C. Repair damage caused by flooring work; clean using methods and materials recommended by manufacturers of damaged surfaces; replace materials that cannot be repaired to match adjacent undamaged materials.

END OF SECTION
09 67 55 - 4 Urethane Food Preparation Flooring
TP-430
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/15/2023
SECTION 09 68 10

TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide carpet tile including edge strips where carpeting terminates at other floor finishes and accessories as required for complete finished installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 09 68 00: Broadloom type carpeting.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Prior to final acceptance of carpet tile installation, submit manufacturer's detailed maintenance recommendations for care, cleaning and repair of carpet tiles installed.

B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate carpet tile layout, direction of carpet tiles, adhesive to be used, method of integrating edge strips with carpet tile, and installation procedures.

C. Samples: Submit samples of each carpet tile type and color, and of each color of edge strip.

D. Certificate of Compliance: Furnish manufacturer's certificate of compliance stating each material delivered conforms to Specifications.

E. Maintenance Recommendations: Prior to final acceptance of carpet tile installation, furnish carpet tile manufacturer's detailed maintenance recommendations for care, cleaning and repair of carpet tiles installed.

F. Maintenance Materials: Submit unused carpet tiles. Box unused carpet tiles and mark boxes indicating color and location installed.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for carpet systems and adhesives.

B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years successful experience in carpet tile installation and approved by carpet tile manufacturer.

1. Upon request, submit letter from carpet manufacturer stating installer is acceptable.

C. Mock-Up: Provide minimum 12' by 12' mock-up of carpet tile for approval prior to beginning installation; approved mock-up may be incorporated into finished installation.
09 68 10 - 1 Tile Carpeting
TP-431
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/15/2023

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not commence carpet tile installation until painting and finishing work is complete and ceiling and other overhead work has been tested, approved and completed, unless specifically approved.

B. Maintain room temperature at minimum 60 degrees F for at least 24 hours prior to installation; relative humidity shall be approximately that at which area is to be maintained.

C. Schedule, receive, and place carpet tile on floors indicated; protect from soiling and damage during transit, storage, and installation.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for promptly making good or replacing defective materials or workmanship. Repairs shall take place within ten days of written notification.

1. Period: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Collins and Aikman Corp.

B. Bentley Prince Street.

C. Interface Flooring Systems, Inc.

D. Lees Carpets, Division of Burlington, Inc.

E. Shaw Commercial Carpets.

F. Manufacturers listed on Finish Schedule.

G. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide carpet tile including edge strips where carpeting terminates at other floor finishes and accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Carpet tiles shall have passed following fire and smoke tests.

1. 2.

3. DOC-FF-1-70: Pass.

ASTM E662 (Smoke Denveloped): 450 or less.

ASTM E648 or NFPA 253 (Flooring Radiant Panel Test): 0.45 or higher.

C. Design Criteria: Provide carpet materials that bear Carpet and Rug Institute “Green Label Plus”.
09 68 10 - 2 Tile Carpeting
TP-432
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/15/2023
D. Performance Requirements, Static: Carpet tile shall develop less than 3.0 kilovolts of static at 70 degrees F and 20 percent relative humidity.

E. Carpet Tile: Types as indicated on Finish Schedule; where carpet tile is not indicated provide as directed by Architect based on following criteria.

1. Yarn: 6.6 or later generation continuous filament soil hiding nylon.

2. Face Weight: Minimum 30 oz. per square yard.

3. Tile Size: As indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of carpet tile sizes where not indicated.

4. Pile Height: Maximum 1/2”.

5. Backing: Integrated polyurethane cushion; no latex backing permitted.

6. Antimicrobial Treatment: Provide to inhibit growth of bacteria, mold, and mildew.

7. Soil-Resistant Treatment: Manufacturer’s standard integral stain resistance.

8. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

F. Adhesive: Nontoxic type recommended by carpet tile manufacturer to suit application and expected service.

G. Leveling and Ramping Material: Latex-cement material designed for providing thin solid surface for leveling and minor ramping of subsurface to adjacent floor finishes.

1. Use material capable of being applied and feathered out to adjacent floor without spalling.

H. Edge Strips: Vinyl or rubber.

1. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

I. Accessories: Provide as required for complete finished installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster and other substances detrimental to proper performance of adhesive and carpet tile; allow floors to thoroughly dry.

B. Ensure floors are level, with maximum surface variation of 1/4" in 10 feet.

C. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregularities and exhibit neutrality relative to acidity and alkalinity.
09 68 10 - 3 Tile Carpeting
TP-433
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/15/2023
D. Use leveling and ramping material to patch cracks, small holes, leveling and for ramping to provide finished carpet tile within 1/2" of adjacent flooring materials.

E. Test substrate for moisture content in accordance with flooring manufacturer recommendations; where moisture content exceeds recommendations take measures recommended by flooring manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install carpet tiles in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

1. Adhere tiles to subfloor unless otherwise approved.

B. Prime substrate if required and as recommended by manufacturer. Spread adhesive in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure proper adhesion. Apply only enough adhesive to permit proper adhesion of carpet tile before initial set.

C. Lay carpet tile with run of pile in direction of anticipated traffic; do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to next where continuous through a wall opening.

1. Finished installation to provide monolithic carpet tile appearance as approved by Architect.

D. Cut and fit carpet tile neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other vertical surfaces.

E. Fit carpet tiles snugly to walls or other vertical surfaces, leaving no gaps.

F. Lay installation tight and flat to subfloor well fastened and uniform in appearance; ensure monolithic color, pattern and texture match within any one area.

G. Edging Strips: Install in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions.

1. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings.

2. Use full length pieces only, butt tight to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided, butt ends tight and flush.

H. Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpet tiled surfaces for not less than 24 hours or until adhesive is set.

3.3 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of carpet tile installation in each area, visually inspect carpet tile installed in that area and immediately remove dirt, soil and foreign substance from exposed face.

B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Inspect adjacent surfaces and remove marks and stains caused by carpet tile installation. 09 68 10 - 4 Tile Carpeting
TP-434
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/15/2023
D. Remove packaging materials, carpet tile scraps, and other debris from carpet tile installation.

END OF SECTION
09 68 10 - 5 Tile Carpeting
TP-435
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 09 90 00

PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide painting and finishing of exposed items and surfaces requiring field painting and finishing including shop primed items.

1. Specified surface preparation, priming and coats of paint are in addition to shoppriming and surface treatment specified under other sections of work.

2. Painting and finishing include field finishing of exterior and interior items not listed as "Surfaces not to be Painted" unless clearly indicated otherwise.

Painting and finishing include field finishing of select shop finished items such as mechanical grilles and registers and shop primed items such as access panels and louvers in doors, to match adjacent surfaces.

3. a. Match adjacent surfaces in color and sheen unless otherwise indicated.

4. Field paint exposed bare and covered pipes, ducts, and hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under mechanical and electrical work in occupied spaces.

B. Surfaces Not to be Painted:

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. Finished items including finished metal surfaces.

Walls and ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas.

Moving parts of operating mechanical and electrical units.

Labels: Keep equipment identification and fire rating labels free of paint.

Plastic smoke stops and weather-stripping at doors.

C. Related Sections: Shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under various Specification sections.

1. Section 09 96 70: High performance coating for exterior steel.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information, including paint label analysis and application instructions for each material.

B. Samples: Submit samples for review of color and texture; provide list of material and application for each coat of each finish sample.

1. Brush-Outs: Submit samples of each color and material with texture to simulate actual conditions, on hardboard.
09 90 00 - 1 Painting and Coating
TP-436
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
a. Submit 8" by 10" samples of wood finishes on actual wood surfaces; label and identify each as to location and application.
b. Submit samples of concrete masonry (maximum 4" square) defining filler, prime and finish coats.

2. Field Samples: Duplicate painted finishes of approved samples on actual wall surfaces and components for approval prior to commencing work. a.
b.
c.

Size: Minimum 100 sf located where approved.

Components: One full component as directed.

Simulate finished lighting conditions for review.

C. Manufacturer Certificates: Furnish certificates from each manufacturer stating materials are top quality lines and suitable for intended use on this Project.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for paints and coatings.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, with:

1. 2.

3. 4.

Name of material, color and sheen.

Manufacturer's name, stock number and date of manufacture.

Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.

Thinning and application instructions.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-base paints when temperature of surfaces and surrounding air are between 50 and 90-degrees F.

B. Do not apply paint in rain, fog or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified.

D. Provide additional temporary ventilation during interior application of paints to eliminate volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions from interior spaces as quickly as possible.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Benjamin Moore & Co.

B. Sherwin-Williams Co.
09 90 00 - 2 Painting and Coating
TP-437
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. Pittsburgh Paints, PPG Pittsburgh Paints, including Glidden Professional.

D. Dunn-Edwards Corp.

E. Kelly Moore Paint Co.

F. Vista Paint Co.

G. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide painting and finishing of exposed items and surfaces requiring field painting and finishing including shop primed items.

1. Definition: "Painting" and “coating” as used herein means systems including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Emissions: Furnish materials approved for use by applicable air quality management district for limitations of volatile organic compounds for architectural or special coatings as applicable.

CALIFORNIA REQUIREMENT BELOW, REVISE IF OTHER METHOD USED AT EXIT STAIRS.

2. California Stair Stripes: Paint 2" stripes at stair nosing not otherwise marked, full tread and landing width, in accordance with California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Access Compliance requirements.
a.
b.

Exterior Stairs: Provide at landing and each tread in each stair run.

Interior Stairs: Provide at landing and last tread at each stair run.

C. Material Quality: Provide top line quality commercial grade (professional painter) paints; materials not bearing manufacturer's identification as their top line product shall not be acceptable.

1. Primers: Provide premium grade primers recommended by paint manufacturer for substrates indicated and for finish systems specified.

2. Undercoats and Barrier Coats: Provide undercoat paints produced by same manufacturer as finish coats; use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and use only within recommended limits.

3. Finish Coats: Provide finish coats capable of being washed with mild detergent without loss of color, sheen, or pigments.
a. Color pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated; no lead content permitted.
09 90 00 - 3 Painting and Coating
TP-438
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

4. Finish Coat Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints, undercoats, and barrier coats used.
a. Review other Specification sections in which prime paints are provided; ensure compatibility of total coatings systems.
b. Upon request from other trades furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use.
c. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and prime as required.
d. Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems in use of specified coating systems with substrates primed by others.

D. Colors and Finishes: Prior to commencement of painting work, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be painted.

1. Use of proprietary names in color selection is not intended to imply exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers.

2. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on site.

3. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Inspection: Examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied.

1. Start of painting work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions of surfaces and conditions within any area.

2. Where exposed items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned in Schedules, paint same as adjacent similar materials or areas.

3. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to a durable paint film.

B. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and as specified for substrate condition.

1. Existing Painted Finishes:
a. Clean existing painted surfaces and remove oil, grease, dust, stains, scale, efflorescence, mildew, mold, algae, blisters, and non-adhering paint. b. Measure adhesion of existing paints using ASTM D3359 tape test; remove existing coatings where poor adhesion is indicated.
09 90 00 - 4 Painting and Coating
TP-439
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
c. Feather edges of severely deteriorated paint where several coats are removed as part of cleaning, to provide smooth transition for new paint. d. Fill holes, cracks, and defects and fill and sand smooth, ready for new paint finish.

C. Remove hardware, accessories, and items in place and not to be painted, or provide protection prior to surface preparation and painting; after painting reinstall removed items.

D. Clean surfaces before applying paint; remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning; program cleaning so contaminants from cleaning process do not fall onto wet, newly painted surfaces.

E. Cementitious Materials: Prepare by removing efflorescence, chalk, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to remove glaze.

1. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted.

2. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, neutralize before application of paint.

3. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds manufacturer's printed directions.

F. Ferrous Metals: Touch up shop-applied prime coats wherever damaged using same type of primer as applied in shop or barrier coat compatible with finish paint.

1. Bare Surfaces: Clean surfaces that are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.

2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants, using nonpetroleum-based solvent; primer and touch-up primer to be zinc-rich primer.

G. Mix painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

H. Store materials in tightly covered containers; maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

I. Stir materials before application to produce mixture of uniform density and stir as required during application; do not stir surface film into material, if necessary, strain material before using.

3.2 APPLICATION
A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions; use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Apply additional coats when stains or blemishes show through final coat, until paint is a uniform finish, color and appearance.

2. Provide extra attention during application to assure dry film thickness at corners and crevices is equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
09 90 00 - 5 Painting and Coating
TP-440
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces; paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment and furniture with prime coat only.

4. Finish doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as faces.

5. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint.

7. Sand lightly between coats when recommended by system manufacturer.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation.

1. Allow time between successive coatings to permit proper drying.

2. Do not recoat until paint feels firm and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure.

C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as recommended by coating manufacturer.

D. Prime Coats: Apply to items not previously primed; recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat.

E. Finish Coats: Provide even texture; leave no laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.

1. Opaque Finishes: Provide opaque, uniform finish, color and coverage; cloudiness, spotting, holidays, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, and other surface imperfections are not acceptable.

2. Transparent and Stained Finishes: Produce glass smooth surface film of even luster; provide with no cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, and other surface imperfections.

F. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage; remove, refinish or repaint work not accepted.

3.3 PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Work: Provide following paint systems and sheens unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal: Semigloss sheen.
a.
b.
1st Coat: Touch-up primer, prime if none.
2nd and 3rd Coat: Exterior 100% acrylic enamel.
09 90 00 - 6 Painting and Coating
TP-441
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

2. Metal: High-performance coating specified in Section 09 96 70.

3. Concrete: Flat sheen.
a. 1st and 2nd Coat: Exterior acrylic latex emulsion.

4. Concrete, Elastomeric Coating:
a. Refer to Section 09 96 80 – Elastomeric Coating.

5. Plaster: Flat sheen.
a. 1st and 2nd Coat: Heavy body vapor permeable waterproof elastomeric acrylic coating.

6. Plaster: Flat sheen.
a. Refer to Section 09 96 80 – Elastomeric Coating.

7. Concrete Masonry Units: Flat sheen.
a.
b.
c.
1st Coat: Surface filler.
2nd and 3rd Coat: Heavy body waterproof acrylic emulsion.

Apply filler at rate to ensure coverage with pores filled.

8. Concrete Masonry Units: Flat sheen.
a. Refer to Section 09 96 80 – Elastomeric Coating.

9. Fiber Cement Siding: Flat sheen.
a.
b.
1st Coat: Alkali resistant primer.
2nd and 3rd Coat: Exterior 100% acrylic enamel.

B. Interior Work: Provide following paint systems and sheens unless otherwise indicated.

1. Gypsum Board Systems: Eggshell (satin) sheen at walls, flat sheen at ceilings, semigloss sheen at toilet rooms.
a.
b.
1st Coat: Universal primer.
2nd and 3rd Coat: Interior latex or acrylic latex emulsion.

2. Metal: Semigloss sheen.
a.
b.
1st Coat: Touch-up primer, prime if none.
2nd and 3rd Coat: 100% acrylic enamel.

3. Concrete Masonry Units: Flat sheen.
a.
b.
c.
1st Coat: Surface filler.
2nd and 3rd Coat: Interior latex emulsion.

Apply filler at rate to ensure coverage with pores filled. 09 90 00 - 7 Painting and Coating
TP-442
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

4. Plaster: Eggshell (satin) sheen at walls, flat sheen at ceilings, semigloss sheen at toilet rooms.
a.
b.
1st Coat: Latex primer-sealer.
2nd and 3rd Coat: Interior acrylic latex emulsion.

5. Cotton and Canvas Covering Over Insulation: Flat sheen. a.
b.
c.
1st (Size) Coat: Interior latex emulsion.
2nd Coat: Interior latex emulsion.

Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

6. Concrete Floors: Gloss sheen; non-slip finish.
a.
b.
1st Coat: Concrete conditioner.
2nd and 3rd Coat: Polyurethane coating.

C. Sheens: Comply with ASTM D523, reflectance of paint.

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. Flat: 1-10.

Satin: 15-30.

Eggshell: 30-45.

Semigloss: 45-75.

Gloss: 75-100.

3.2 CLEAN-UP, PROTECTION, AND REPAIR
A. Clean-Up: During progress of work, remove discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags from site at end of each workday.

1. Clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces immediately by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage finished surfaces.

B. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not; correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect.

1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes.

2. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations.

C. Repair: At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged surfaces or defaced painted surfaces.

END OF SECTION
09 90 00 - 8 Painting and Coating
TP-443
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 09 96 70

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide high-performance coating system of urethane over epoxy primer as indicated, including surface preparation, priming and high-performance coating application.

1. Location: Provide high-performance coating at exterior steel unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate priming with exterior steel specifications.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 09 90 00: Standard painting and coating systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information, including coating label analysis and application instructions for each material.

B. Samples: Submit samples for review of color and texture; provide list of material and application for each coat of each finish sample.

1. Provide samples of each color and material with texture to simulate actual conditions.

C. Certificates: Provide certificate from each manufacturer stating material is top quality line and suitable for intended use on this Project.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for paints and coatings.

B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of five years successful experience in application of high-performance coating systems of type specified and acceptable to manufacturer of coating system.

C. Mock-Up: Duplicate finish of approved samples in field at location as approved by Architect, one complete component or approximately 100 square feet, for approval prior to commencing work.

1. Approved mock-up may be incorporated into Project.
09 96 70 - 1 High-Performance Coating
TP-444
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, with:

1. 2.

3. 4.

Name of material, color and sheen.

Manufacturer's name, stock number and date of manufacture.

Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.

Thinning and application instructions.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Apply high performance coating when temperature of surfaces and surrounding air are between manufacturer recommended temperatures.

B. Do not apply high performance coating in rain, fog or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85-percent; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of high-performance coating including peeling, chipping, rusting of substrate, cracking, delamination, chalking, and loss of color and sheen.

1. Period: Two years.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty including special manufacturer services as required for manufacturer’s warranty.

1. Period: 10 years.

2. Manufacturer's warranty shall not detract from requirements of extended correction period nor from Owner’s rights under implied and expressed warranties regardless of wording of manufacturer’s warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. DuPont Co. Maintenance Finishes.

B. Tnemec Company, Inc.

C. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide high performance coating system of urethane over epoxy primer as indicated, including surface preparation, priming and highperformance coating application. 09 96 70 - 2 High-Performance Coating
TP-445
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Regulatory Requirements, Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Emissions: Provide materials complying with applicable air quality management requirements for volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions limitations.

C. Special Coating: High build acrylic polyurethane or aliphatic polyurethane over compatible epoxy primer as recommended by coating manufacturer and suitable for applications indicated and based on quality of following products.

1. Systems:
a.
b.
c.
d.

DuPont/Imron with 25P primer.

Tnemec/Endura-Shield II (Series 1075) with Series V69 epoxy primer.

PPG/AmerShield VOC with Amerlock 400 primer.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Special Coating System: Provide specific primer and coating as recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated, conforming to specified requirements. a. 1st Coat: Epoxy primer.
b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: High-build acrylic polyurethane or high-build polyurethane.

3. System Requirements:
a. Abrasion: ASTM D4060, CS-17 Wheel, 1,000 grams load, no more than 95 mg. loss after 1000 cycles.
b. Adhesion: ASTM D3359 Method B (Crosshatch Adhesion), coating applied to sandblasted steel and cured 30 days at 77° F, minimum rating of 5 on average of three tests.
c. Humidity: ASTM D4585, no blistering, cracking or delamination of film after 1000 hours exposure.
d. Salt Spray (Fog): ASTM B117, no blistering, rusting, cracking, or delamination of film; maximum 1/8" rust creepage at scribe after 1000 hours exposure. e. UV: ASTM G154, no blistering, cracking or chalking, less than 35% gloss loss and less than 3.5 MacAdam unit color change after 1500 hours exposure.

4. Coordination: Provide special coating system compatible with prime paints, undercoats, and barrier coats used.
a. Review other Specification sections in which prime paints and zinc-rich touchcoatings up are provided; ensure compatibility of total coatings systems.

Upon request from other trades furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use.

Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Reprime with zinc-rich primer where galvanized. b.
c.
09 96 70 - 3 High-Performance Coating
TP-446
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
d. Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems in use of specified coating systems with substrates primed by others.

D. Colors and Finishes:

1. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

2. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on site.

3. Color pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated; no lead content permitted.

4. Sheen: Gloss; comply with ASTM D523, reflectance of coating, 75-100.

E. Material Quality: Provide primers produced by same manufacturer as finish coats; use only thinners approved by coating manufacturer and use only within recommended limits.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Inspection: Examine areas and conditions under which high performance coating work is to be applied.

1. Start of high-performance coating work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions of surfaces and conditions within any particular area.

2. Do not apply coating over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to a durable coating.

B. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions and as specified for substrate condition.

C. Remove items in place and not to be coated or provide protection prior to application of high-performance coating; after application of coating reinstall removed items.

D. Clean surfaces before applying high-performance coating; remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning; program cleaning so contaminants from cleaning process do not fall onto wet, newly coated surfaces.

E. Metal Preparation: Comply with coating manufacturer recommendations, but not less than following requirements.

1. Bare Surfaces: Clean surfaces which are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.

2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants, using nonpetroleum-based solvent. 09 96 70 - 4 High-Performance Coating
TP-447
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3. Painted Surfaces: Clean surfaces of loose paint, dirt, and foreign substances by mechanical cleaning; feather edges of existing paint to provide smooth, even substrate for high performance coating.

F. Mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

G. Store materials in tightly covered containers; maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of coating in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

H. Stir materials before application to produce mixture of uniform density and stir as required during application; do not stir surface film into material, if necessary, strain material before using.

3.2 APPLICATION
A. Apply high performance coating in accordance with manufacturer's directions; use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and coating material being applied.

1. Apply additional coats when stains or blemishes show through final coat, until coating is a uniform finish, color and appearance.

2. Provide extra attention to assure dry film thickness at corners and crevices is equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

B. Scheduling: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or prepared for high performance coating as soon as practicable after preparation.

1. Allow time between successive coatings to permit proper drying.

2. Do not recoat until coating feels firm and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure.

C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as recommended by coating manufacturer.

D. Prime Coats: Apply to items not previously primed; recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat.

E. Finish Coats: Provide even texture; leave no laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections; edges clean and sharp where work joins other materials and colors.

1. Provide opaque, uniform finish, color and coverage; cloudiness, spotting, holidays, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness and other surface imperfections are not acceptable.

F. Completed Work: Match approved samples and mock-up for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or recoat work not accepted. 09 96 70 - 5 High-Performance Coating
TP-448
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3.3 CLEAN-UP, PROTECTION AND REPAIR
A. Clean-Up: During progress of work, remove discarded coating materials, rubbish, cans and rags from site at end of each workday.

1. Clean glass and coating-spattered surfaces immediately by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage finished surfaces.

B. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be coated or not; correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and refinishing, as acceptable to Architect.

1. Provide "Wet Coating" or "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated surfaces.

2. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of coating operations.

C. Repair: At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged surfaces and defaced coated surfaces.

END OF SECTION
09 96 70 - 6 High-Performance Coating
TP-449
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 10 11 00

VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide visual display boards including liquid marker type whiteboards and cork tackboards with trim, hardware, and accessories as required for complete installation.

1. 2.

Provide horizontal sliding visual display boards where indicated.

Provide vertical sliding visual display boards where indicated.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate board sizes and layout, method of attachment, accessories, trim profiles, details and finish.

B. Samples: Furnish sample whiteboard and tackboard surfaces with samples of aluminum trim and chalk rail, in selected colors and finish.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver materials to site until areas in which they are to be installed are ready to receive them.

B. Deliver materials to site in protective covering in a manner to protect finishes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.

B. Greensteel Division of PolyVision Corporation.

C. ADP Lemco Inc.

D. AARCO Products Inc.

E. K-PRO Specialty Products.

F. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide visual display boards including liquid marker type whiteboards and cork tackboards with trim, hardware, and accessories.

B. Steel Sheet for Porcelain Enameling: ASTM A424, minimum 24 gage. 10 11 00 - 1 Visual Display Boards
TP-450
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, minimum 0.062" wall thickness.

D. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, minimum 0.015" thick.

E. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011 or A1008, Class 1; ASTM A924 and A653, G90 coating; minimum 26 gage (0.0179").

F. Tempered Hardboard: Manufacturer's standard material.

G. Plywood: PS 1, manufacturer's standard.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Whiteboards: Porcelain writing surface manufactured specifically for use with liquid marker systems.

1. Type:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Claridge/LCS Liquid Chalk System.

Greensteel/Dry Marker Board.

ADP Lemco/Markerboards.

AARCO/Porcelain Steel Markerboards.

K-PRO/Porcelain Steel Markerboards.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Core: Minimum 3/8" thick plywood.

3. Balance porcelain writing surface with aluminum or sheet steel backing, aluminum foil is not acceptable.

4. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

5. Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard accessories including map hooks and projection screen hooks.

6. Markerboard Face Sheets: Porcelain steel markerboard manufactured specifically for use with liquid marker systems and magnetic surface. a. Provide markerboard face sheets for sliding panels and back panel. b. Provide markerboard face sheets and tackboard face sheets for sliding panels and markerboard for back panel.

7. Balance porcelain writing surface with aluminum or sheet steel backing, aluminum foil is not acceptable.

8. Core: Manufacturer’s standard for specified system.

9. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.
10 11 00 - 2 Visual Display Boards
TP-451
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Frames: Extruded aluminum, factory applied, concealed fastening; integral chalk rail with molded end closures; anodized finish, matching Architect-approved sample.

1. Framed Units: Fabricate one-piece units without joints unless sizes indicated are not available as one-piece units.
a. Multiple Units: Provide joints located at whiteboard and tackboard intersection or at areas as approved by Architect; concealed splice joints typical.
b. Factory Fabricate: Factory fabricate except where too large for shipping.

C. Attachment Hardware: Manufacturer's standard fully concealed attachment system for securing units to wall surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Securely mount whiteboards and tackboards in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, level and true to line.

1. Multiple Units: Provide flush, butt, hairline joints to ensure a smooth writing surface between whiteboards.

2. Sliding Units: Provide rattle and chatter-free operation; boards to move with maximum 5-pounds pressure and to stop and hold in any position.

B. Cleaning: At completion of work, clean surfaces and trim, leaving ready for use.

END OF SECTION
10 11 00 - 3 Visual Display Boards
TP-452
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 10 14 00

SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide general signage as indicated complete with attachment devices and accessories as required for complete installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. 2.

3. 4.

Section 09 90 00: Traffic line paint.

Section 10 44 00: Fire extinguisher cabinet graphics.

Division 14: Elevator graphics.

Division 26: Photoluminescent exit signs.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature and indicate each sign type, style, color, and method of attachment.

B. Shop Drawings: Furnish listing of sign types, lettering and locations, along with dimensions of each sign.

1. Computerized Output: Furnish computerized samples of signs and graphics at full scale duplicating final appearance.

2. Dimensional Letter Signs: Furnish complete shop drawings regarding fabrication and method of attachment of dimension letter signs.

3. Photoluminescent Egress Path Signage: Submit complete shop drawings indicating locations of luminous egress path markings and signage.

C. Samples: Furnish full size samples where requested.

D. Certification: Furnish manufacturer certification that photoluminescent egress path markings and signage conform to California Building Code requirements.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package separately or in like groups of names, labeled as to names enclosed; include installation template, attachment system and installation instructions. 10 14 00 - 1 Signage
TP-453
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. ASI Modulex, ASI Sign Systems, Inc.

B. Mohawk Sign Systems.

C. Vomar Products, Inc.

D.

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide signage as indicated with attachment devices and accessories.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Provide signs for assuring access for persons with disabilities in accordance with state and federal regulations.

1. California Regulations: Comply with California Building Code.

2. Federal Regulations: Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards.

C. Dimensional Letter Signage: Provide individual letter signs as indicated.

1. Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard for individual letter signs. a. Finish: Kynar / Hynar finish – custom color

2. Fabrication: Fabricate dimensional letters as indicated, of minimum 0.25" plate or casting with edges and corners smooth and finished to match adjacent metal finishes.

3. Attachment: Secure letters using connections concealed after installation; method subject to Architect approval.
a. Take care back welding does not damage exposed sign surfaces.

D. Dimensional Super Graphic Signage:

1. Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard for shape / graphic signs. a. Finish: Kynar / Hynar finish – custom color

2. Fabrication: Fabricate shapes as indicated, of minimum 0.25" plate or casting with edges and corners smooth and finished to match adjacent metal finishes.

3. Attachment: Secure using connections concealed after installation; method subject to Architect approval.
10 14 00 - 2 Signage
TP-454
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
E. Toilet Room Door Signs: Provide door signs conforming to California requirements for signs for toilet rooms; concealed mounting system.

1. Material, Plastic: Manufacturer’s standard colored plastic/photopolymer signs. a. Texture: Smooth.
b. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

2. Material:
a. Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard for individual letter signs. 1) Finish: Clear anodized finish, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, AAMA 607.1. b. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 304 nonmagnetic corrosion resistant stainless steel with No. 4 satin directional polish finish.

3. Total Thickness: 0.25".

4. Provide signs required by California Code of Regulations Title 24. a. Men's Room: 12" equilateral triangle, vertex pointing up. b. Women’s Room: 12" diameter circle.
c. Unisex Shower / Rest Room: 12" diameter circle with equilateral triangle, vertex pointing up, superimposed on the circle; circle and triangle each 0.25" thick.
1) Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

5. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

6. Symbols: As selected from manufacturer's standard symbols.

7. Adhesive: Type as recommended by sign manufacturer for type of substrate involved.

F. Toilet Room Wall Signs: Provide signs conforming to California Building Code and ADA Standards for signs for permanent rooms, with inset symbols and with raised and Braille characters; concealed mounting system.

1. Material, Plastic: Manufacturer’s standard colored plastic/photopolymer signs. a. Texture: Smooth.

2. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.
10 14 00 - 3 Signage
TP-455
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3. Material:
a. Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard for individual letter signs. 1) Finish: Clear anodized finish, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, AAMA 607.1. b. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 304 nonmagnetic corrosion resistant stainless steel with No. 4 satin directional polish finish.

4. Comply with California Building Code and ADA Standards for raised and Braille characters, pictorial symbols, finish, and contrasts requirements.

G. Entry Decals: Provide minimum 6" square decals with international handicapped symbol white on blue background with white border, applied to glass at accessible entry doors of existing buildings where all entry doors are not accessible.

Stairway Signs: Provide colored plastic/photopolymer signs in stairways, conforming to California Building Standards Code, Section 1022.9.

H.

1. 2.

Lettering: Type as required by CBC.

Colors, Size, and Style: Conform to referenced code requirements and as approved by Architect.
a. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule or specifically required by applicable code, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

3. Information: Identify stairway, indicate whether there is roof access, floor level, and upper and lower terminus of stairway, and story of and direction to exit discharge.

Provide raised five-pointed star located to left of identifying floor level at exit discharge level.

Provide Floor Identification Signs required by CBC including both tactile and Braille sign.

4. 5.

6. Provide photoluminescent egress path marking and signs as required by California Building Code for high rise buildings and as specified for photoluminescent egress markings and signage.

I. Porcelain Signs at Parking: Provide porcelain enamel on steel sign with beaded text and symbols meeting requirements of California Building Standards Code and with ADA Standards.

1. At entry to parking provide state required sign indicating unauthorized vehicles parking in accessible parking spaces may be towed at owner's expense using exact wording required by CBC.

2. Verify location and telephone number of location vehicle is to be towed with Owner; place this information as permanent part of sign wording. 10 14 00 - 4 Signage
TP-456
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3. At parking spaces provide California required reflectorized sign, minimum 70 sq. inches, with symbol indicating accessibility.

4. At van accessible parking spaces provide required "VAN PARKING" signs.

J. Tactile Exit Door Signs: Provide colored plastic/photopolymer signs, conforming to California Building Code Section 1011.3 and ADA Standards for signs for permanent rooms, with tactile raised and Braille characters; concealed mounting system.

1. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

2. Size and Style: As indicated on Drawings.

K. Room Identification and Direction Signs: Provide signs conforming to California and ADA Standards for permanent signs, total thickness 0.125"; provide raised and Braille characters conforming to California and ADA Standards; concealed mounting.

1. Material, Plastic: Manufacturer’s standard colored plastic/photopolymer signs. a. Texture: Smooth.

2. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

3. Material:
a. Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard for individual letter signs. 1) Finish: Clear anodized finish, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, AAMA 607.1. b. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 304 nonmagnetic corrosion resistant stainless steel with No. 4 satin directional polish finish.

4. Sizes and Styles: As indicated on Drawings, as directed by Architect where not otherwise indicated.

L. Applied Copy Signs and Graphics: Letters and graphics as indicated on Drawings; Contractor option of silk-screen or vinyl applied.

1. Silk-screen Signs and Graphics: Computer design screens for signs and graphics to designs and criteria established by Architect.
a. Silk-screen Lacquer: Match Advanced Screen Products/Industrial Gloss Lacquer Silk-screen Ink; colors as selected by Architect.

2. Vinyl Signs and Graphics: Computer design vinyl signs and graphics to designs and criteria established by Architect.
a. Vinyl: Opaque non-reflective vinyl film, minimum 0.0035" thick, with pressure sensitive adhesive backing suitable for applications indicated; match 3M/Scotchcal Vinyl Film.
10 14 00 - 5 Signage
TP-457
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

M. Tactile Emergency Evacuation Signs: Silk-screened polycarbonate with screening on back and with tactile and Braille information conforming to California requirements and ADA Standards.

1. Information: Provide sign system with information as required by applicable authorities for emergency egress.

2. Silk-Screen Colors:
a. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.
b. Silk-screen Lacquer: Match Advanced Screen Products/Industrial Gloss Lacquer Silk-screen Ink; colors as selected by Architect.

3. Size and Style: As indicated on Drawings and acceptable to applicable authorities.

4. Attachment: Method subject to Architect approval.

N. Photoluminescent Egress Path Markings and Signage: Provide exit path marking and signage required by applicable codes including but not limited to exit path markings, stair nosing, handrails, demarcation and obstruction markings, doors, and hardware.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Balco Inc./IllumiTread Exit Path Markings.

ZERO International/Exit Marking Systems.

American Permalight Inc./Egress Path Markings.

Active Safety/Egress Path Markings.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Refer to CBC Title 24, Part 2, Section 1025.

3. 4.

System: UL 1994 listed.

Photoluminescent exit signs are in Division 26.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install signs in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions, free from distortions and defects.

Dimensional Letter Signage: Locate dimensional letters with spacing based on fullsize computer-generated installation drawings secured to structure as required to resist anticipated loads.

B.

1. Final Location: As approved in field by Architect based on full size drawings. 10 14 00 - 6 Signage
TP-458
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. Toilet Room Door Signs: Install signs on doors after doors are painted and finished.

1. Location: Mount signs with centerline of sign between 58" and 60" height as required by applicable code.

2. Install centered and level, in line, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Clean and polish, remove excess adhesive.

D. Toilet Room Wall Signs: Install signs on walls after surfaces on which they are to be mounted are painted and finished.

1. Location: Mount signs at 48" to 60" height as required by applicable codes on strike side of door.

2. Location: Mount signs with tactile characters 48" minimum (baseline of lowest Braille cells) and 60" maximum (baseline of highest line of raised characters) above finished floor and with on strike side of door for room identification signs as required by applicable codes, at heights indicated on details.

3. Install level, in line, in accordance with California Building Code and ADA Standards to allow a person to approach within 3" of signs without being within a door swing and without encountering protruding objects.

4. Clean and polish, remove excess adhesive.

E. Entry Signs: Install in locations as approved by Architect.

F. Tactile Exit Door Signs: Install at doors with lighted “EXIT” signs; apply after walls are finished.

1. Location: Mount signs at 48" to 60" height as required by applicable codes on strike side of door.

2. Install level, in line, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and ADA Standards to allow a person to approach within 3" of signs without being within a door swing and without encountering protruding objects.

3. Clean and polish, remove excess adhesive.

G. Room Identification and Direction Signs: Install signs after walls are finished.

1. Location: Mount signs at 48" to 60" height as required by applicable codes on strike side of door for room identification signs, where indicated for direction signs.

2. Room Identification Signs Location: Mount signs with tactile characters 48" minimum (baseline of lowest Braille cells) and 60" maximum (baseline of highest line of raised characters) above finished floor and with on strike side of door for room identification signs and where indicated for directional signs. 10 14 00 - 7 Signage
TP-459
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3. Install signs level, in line, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, California Building Code and ADA Standards.

4. Install room identification signs at doors to allow a person to approach within 3" of signs without being within a door swing and without encountering protruding objects.

5. Clean and polish, remove excess adhesive.

H. Applied Copy Signs and Graphics: Examine surfaces and construction for conditions adversely affecting installation, performance and quality of work.

1. Apply signage and graphics centered and level, in line, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

I. Emergency Evacuation Signs: Install signs after walls are finished.

1. Location: Mount signs at locations indicated, as directed by Architect and applicable authorities if not otherwise indicated.

2. Install signs level and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of applicable authorities.

3. Clean and polish.

END OF SECTION
10 14 00 - 8 Signage
TP-460
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 10 21 20

PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide phenolic plastic partitions for toilet compartments including hardware, attachment devices, and integral accessories as required for complete installation.

1. Urinal Screens: Provide wall mounted phenolic plastic partitions for urinal screens including attachment hardware for complete finished installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 10 28 00: Toilet accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards.

B. California Building Code: California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, requirements for providing accessibility for persons with disabilities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate partition layouts, swing of doors, elevations, anchorage and mounting details, panel construction, hardware, finishes and relevant dimensions.

C. Samples: Submit samples of metal finish.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants, and caulks.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Global Partitions, an ASI Group Company. (Basis of Design) B. Flush Metal Partition Corp.

C. Bradley Corporation Mills Partitions.

D. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.
10 21 20 - 1 Phenolic Toilet Compartments
TP-461
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide phenolic plastic partitions including hardware, attachment devices, and integral accessories.

1. Toilet Compartment Type: Floor mounted, overhead braced.

2. Urinal Screens: Provide wall mounted urinal screens.

B. Regulatory Requirements, Access: Comply with California Building Code and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards.

1. Door Width: Provide minimum 32" clear door openings when front entry, minimum 34" clear door openings when side entry.

2. Spacing: Provide minimum 60" clear width, and front space as applicable for type of compartment.

3. Reinforcing: Provide reinforcing for grab bars indicated to be partition mounted.

4. Urinal Screens: Provide minimum 30" clear space at urinal.

C. Regulatory Requirements, Fire Rating: Comply with requirements for fire ratings for interior finishes with either ASTM E84 or NFPA 286, Corner Burn Test as applicable.

D. Phenolic Panels: Manufacturer's standard phenolic core with high pressure melamine color surface on faces, with exposed black phenolic edges burnished and slightly rounded. Basis of Design: ASI Accurate Partitions, Graphite Grafix #3020, black phenolic core.

E. Pilaster Shoes: 3" high; ASTM A666, Type 304, No. 4 polished finish; stainless steel.

F. Attachments, Screws and Bolts: Stainless steel; tamper proof type; heavy duty extruded aluminum brackets.

G. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard chrome plated or similar finish.

1. Hinges: Cast pivot hinges, gravity self-closing type, adjustable for door close positioning; nylon bearings.

2. Latch: Slide latch; door strike and keeper with rubber bumper.

3. Coat Hook/Bumper: Combination coat hook and bumper unit, maximum 48" above finished floor.

4. Wall Bumper: Wall mounted rubber bumper for out-swinging doors.

5. Pulls: Manufacturer’s standard; provide two "U-shaped" pulls immediately below latch at compartments accessible to persons with disabilities (compartments with grab bars), one inside and one outside.
10 21 20 - 2 Phenolic Toilet Compartments
TP-462
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
H. Overhead Braced Partition Headrails: 1" by 1-5/8" tubular metal, with cast socket type wall brackets.

1. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate: Manufacturer’s standard construction.

B. Doors and Panels: Minimum 3/4" thick doors and 1/2” thick panels, minimum 24" wide by minimum 58" high.

1. Provide wider doors where required for accessibility for persons with disabilities.

C. Pilasters: 1-1/4" thick, constructed same as doors, of sizes required to suit cubicle widths and spacing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine site conditions to which work is to be applied.

B. Take site dimensions affecting this work.

C. Ensure correct spacing and size of plumbing fixtures; take special note of fixtures in compartments indicated to be designed for persons with disabilities to assure clearances complying with access regulations.

D. Ensure correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing, where required.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions, secure, plumb, level, and square.

B. Leave 1/2" space between wall, panels and end pilasters.

C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices.

D. Attach panels and pilasters to bracket with through sleeve tamper proof bolts and nuts.

E. Locate headrail joints at pilaster center lines.

F. Provide for adjustment of floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster; conceal floor fastenings with stainless steel shoes.

G. Equip each door with hinges, latch, and coat hook/bumper combination.

H. Install door strike keeper and door bumper on each pilaster in alignment with door latch. 10 21 20 - 3 Phenolic Toilet Compartments
TP-463
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
I. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edges of doors not exceeding 3/16".

J. Adjust hinges to locate doors in partial open position when unlatched, except adjust hinges to return doors to closed position at stalls designed for use by persons with disabilities.

K. Anchor urinal screen panels to walls with either two panel brackets each or continuous angle brackets on both sides.

3.3 CLEANING
A. Field touch-up of scratches and defaced finishes will not be permitted; replace damaged, scratched and marred defective materials with new, undamaged materials.

B. Remove protective coverings and clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

END OF SECTION
10 21 20 - 4 Phenolic Toilet Compartments
TP-464
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
SECTION 10 22 20

OPERABLE PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide manually operated, top supported, operable partitions with retractable seals, including hardware and accessories as required for complete, operable system.

1. Acoustical Closure: Review Contract Documents to ensure acoustical closure of adjacent construction matches operable partition acoustical performance to prevent flanking sound around partition into adjacent spaces. a. Provide additional construction as required to ensure acoustical closure.

2. Support System: Provide structural steel support system connected to building structure at points approved by Architect.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design/Build Requirements: Provide services of registered structural engineer licensed in California with experience designing structural support systems for operable partitions.

1. Distribute loads to locations on building structure capable of supporting system without detrimental effects.

B. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing work of this Section. Require attendance of those directly affecting work of this Section.

1. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish materials description, operation and maintenance instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Show partition and track layout, details of head, jamb and sill conditions, stacking arrangement, hardware and operating mechanism.

1. Indicate details of acoustical barrier over partitions system.

2. Provide template drawings for items supported or anchored by permanent construction.

3. Indicate details of pass doors.

C. Samples: Furnish samples of panel finish and edge construction. 10 22 20 - 1 Operable Partitions
TP-465
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
D. Test Reports: Furnish copies of certificates by independent testing laboratories for following:

1. 2.

1. 2.

STC rating.

Flame spread classification.

Fire resistance ratings.

Field STC Tests: Furnish previous project test reports.

E. Certificates:

1. Manufacturer Certification: Furnish manufacturer’s certification indicating system complies with Contract Documents.

2. Installer Acceptance: Furnish letter from manufacturer indicating acceptance of installer for this Project.

3. Design/Build Engineer Certification: Furnish certification from California registered engineer indicating structural support system complies with Contract Documents and applicable codes.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification of Installers: Minimum five years successful experience in installing operable partitions and accessories on comparable projects.

1. Acceptable to manufacturer of operable partition.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of operable partition system from proper operation, including acoustical characteristics.

1. Special Warranty Period: Two years.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty including special manufacturer services as required for manufacturer’s warranty.

1. Period: Not less than 10 years.

2. Manufacturer's warranty shall not detract from requirements of extended correction period nor from Owner’s rights under implied and expressed warranties regardless of wording of manufacturer’s warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Modernfold, a DORMA Group Company.

B. Hufcor, Inc.

C. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
10 22 20 - 2 Operable Partitions
TP-466
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide electrically operated operable partitions with retractable seals and including hardware and accessories.

1. Partition Type: Top-supported, side-stacking, electrically operated, with flush panels; manufacturer's STC 50 as required to achieve required field performance requirements.
a. Basis of Design: Hufcor 643E

2. Acoustical Closure: Provide acoustical closure of adjacent construction as required to match operable partition acoustical performance and as required to prevent flanking sound around partition into adjacent spaces.

3. Structural Support: Provide structural support for operable partitions.

B. Design Requirements: Support system to be designed by registered professional structural engineer licensed in California.

1. Distribute loads to locations on building structure capable of supporting system without detrimental effects.

C. Fire Performance Requirements: Provide products listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL), or similar independent laboratory acceptable to applicable authorities.

1. Flame Spread/Smoke Generation: Provide products meeting code requirements for maximum 25 flame-spread and 450 smoke developed; Class A, ASTM E84.

D. Field Acoustical Performance Requirements: Provide minimum three field sound transmission rating tests on previous projects of similar size and scope indicating system to be provided has minimum FSTC of NIC 40.

1. Ratings: Determined in accordance with ASTM E413; tests by Architect approved independent testing laboratory.

2. Field Sound Transmission Rating: Minimum FSTC of NIC 40 when tested in accordance with ASTM E336, using reverberant-field procedure and full octave bands rather than one-third octave bands.

E. Partition Type: Top-supported, side-stacking, manually operated, with flush panels.

1. Panel Configuration: Paired panels.

F. Panel Construction: Factory assembled, consisting of minimum 16 gage welded steel channel perimeter frame with intermediate stiles, high density sound retardant insulation.

1. Panel Thickness: Nominal 3" to 4" thick; review Drawings for space provided for panel storage; provide panel system suitable of allowable space. a. Notify Architect during bidding if Project design requires potential modification for system to comply with Contract Document. 10 22 20 - 3 Operable Partitions
TP-467
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
b. Failure to notify Architect during bidding signifies acceptance of conditions indicated.

2. Panel Skins: Minimum 24-gage steel with rust inhibitive prime coat of paint.

3. Panel Support Bolts: Minimum 1/2" diameter; of fail-safe design that prevents loosening or backing out after panels have been installed.

4. Panel Materials: Incombustible, moisture resistant, and dimensionally stable.

5. Construction: All steel construction.

G. Track System: Overhead track designed for extra heavy duty; secured to structural support system by adjustable bolts.

1. Panel Supports: Ball bearing trolley assembly, capable of universal movement, turning on a central bearing and shall not require radius turns or switching mechanisms.

H. Deflection Compensation: Design system to accommodate specified long-term dead load deflection of up to 1/2" at any point in span while maintaining operational and acoustical qualities.

I. Seals: Provide system with single mechanism to activate floor seals; seals shall not contact floor or track during movement of panels.

1. Floor Seals: Durometer rating compatible with floor surfaces.

2. Vertical Seals: Manufacturer's standard as required to achieve acoustical performance specified.

3. Seal Materials: Resistant to fatigue and cleaning compounds and shall not mar floor or ceiling finishes.

4. Floor Guide and Floor Attachments: Not permitted.

J. Fixed and Operable Closure Jambs: Acoustical type designed to maintain acoustical seal at perimeter walls and junctions of operable partition; security affix to building walls.

1. Jamb Seals: Manufacturer's standard acoustic seals at head and side jambs.

2. Floor Seals: Provide flexible compression type; design cam-action of hinges and manual closing of door to compress floor seal and maintain acoustical performance of partition.
a. Raised Sills and Automatic Threshold Closures: Not permitted.

3. Factory Assembly: Factory assemble complete door unit and adjust with hardware and seals prior to shipment.
10 22 20 - 4 Operable Partitions
TP-468
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
K. System Supports and Anchors: ASTM A36 steel shapes as required to attach operable partitions to building structural system.

1. Provide bracing at track intersections to resist panel impacts.

L. Finish: Panel and door finish shall be heavy duty vinyl fabric.

1. Apply finish to panels in shop. Return into vertical panel seams and mechanically fasten with removable astragal at panel edge.

2. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide standard range of products for architect approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine floor and overhead construction for conformance with tolerances; verify dimensions of in place and subsequent construction.

B. Installation of partition shall constitute acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install operable partition system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions as required to assure compliance with sound transmission test requirements.

1. Comply with ANSI E557, Standard Recommended Practice for Architectural Application and Installation of Operable Partitions.

2. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust to ensure smooth, easy operation.

3. Match operable partitions for color and pattern by using partition sections from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged.

4. Broken, cracked, chipped, damaged, and deformed partitions are not acceptable.

B. Upon completion of installation, test operation of partition in presence of Architect.

C. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of partition.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Acoustical Tests: Determine field sound transmission class values in accordance with ASTM E336; tests by Architect approved independent testing laboratory.

1. Field Sound Transmission Rating: Minimum FSTC of NIC 40 when tested in accordance with ASTM E336, using reverberant-field procedure and full octave bands rather than one-third octave bands.

2. Failed Tests: Make corrections and re-test.
10 22 20 - 5 Operable Partitions
TP-469
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean operable partition surfaces and adjacent surfaces soiled by operable partition work; avoid use of abrasive cleaners and solutions containing corrosive solvents.

1. Remove and replace panels and adjacent construction damaged by installation or cleaning operations.

END OF SECTION
10 22 20 - 6 Operable Partitions
TP-470
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
SECTION 10 26 10

STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide surface mounted stainless-steel corner guards, including mounting adhesive and accessories as required for complete finished installation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's product literature.

B. Samples: Furnish samples of finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Babcock-Davis, Inc.

B. In-Pro Corporation.

C. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide surface mounted stainless-steel corner guards, including mounting adhesive and accessories.

B. Corner Guard: ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel with satin finish; not less than 18-gage.

1. Size: 3-1/2" by 3-1/2" by 48" high unless otherwise indicated.

C. Attachment: Manufacturer's recommended adhesive for type of wall.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install stainless-steel corner guards in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions, straight and true to line.

B. Allow for 10 corner guards. Contractor to coordinate locations with client prior to occupancy.

END OF SECTION
10 26 10 - 1 Stainless Steel Corner Guards
TP-471
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 10 28 00

TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide toilet accessories with attachment hardware and rough-in frames as required for complete, operational installation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 08 80 00: Frameless glass mirrors.

2. Section 10 21 10: Hardware for toilet partitions, including coat hook/bumper mounted on partition doors, and wall bumpers for out swinging doors.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data illustrating each accessory at large scale.

B. Samples: Provide one sample of each type of fixture specified.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to jobsite at appropriate time for building in.

B. Do not deliver accessories to site until rooms in which they are to be installed are ready to receive them.

C. Pack accessories individually, protect each item and its finish.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces from damage during installation of work of this section.

B. Before starting work notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to installation or operation of units.

C. Verify with Architect exact location of accessories. 10 28 00 - 1 Toilet Accessories
TP-472
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period:

1. 2.

Replace mirrors which exhibit signs of desilvering or distortion.

Period: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

B. Bradley Corporation.

C. American Specialties, Inc.

D. Manufacturers listed on Toilet Accessories Schedules.

E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide toilet accessories with attachment hardware and roughin frames.

1. Provide standard materials and finishes for accessories listed; where more than one material or finish is available and not otherwise indicated provide as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard materials and finishes.

B. Regulatory Requirements - Access for Persons with Disabilities: Comply with California Building Standards Code and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards.

C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, commercial grade, Type 304, gages as standard with manufacturer of specified items.

D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, commercial grade, seamless welded.

E. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, q1 mirror select clear float glass with full silver coating, copper coating and organic coating; minimum 1/4" thick.

F. Sheet Steel: ASTM A1008, cold rolled stretcher leveled; minimum G90 galvanized coating, ASTM A924 and A653.

G. Adhesive: Epoxy type contact cement as recommended by accessory manufacturer; comply with applicable requirements for limitations on volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.

H. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized; as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate.
10 28 00 - 2 Toilet Accessories
TP-473
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
I. Keys: Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for servicing and supply.

1. Provide minimum six keys to Owner representative.

2. Coin Operated Units: Provide locked coin box keyed separately from standard units, coin operated units keyed alike.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components.

B. Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints.

C. Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled; hang doors and access panels with continuous piano hinges; provide concealed anchorage where possible.

D. Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for installation on building finishes.

E. Form surfaces flat without distortion; maintain flat surfaces without scratches and without dents; finish exposed edges eased, free of sharp edges where potential exists for physical contact.

F. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes, to prevent electrolysis.

G. Hot-dip galvanize ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices.

H. Assemble components in shop; package complete with anchors and fittings.

2.4 FINISHES
A. Exposed Finishes: Stainless steel, number 4, satin finish; satin chrome finish acceptable where stainless steel not available for accessory item listed or scheduled.

B. Concealed Surfaces: Treat and clean, spray-apply one coat primer and baked enamel finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Provide templates and rough-in measurements.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions using fasteners appropriate to substrate.

B. Install true, plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. 10 28 00 - 3 Toilet Accessories
TP-474
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. Use tamper-proof, security type fasteners.

D. Adjust accessories for proper operation and verify mechanisms function smoothly.

E. Replace damaged and defective items.

F. Clean and polish exposed surfaces after removing temporary labels.

3.3 TOILET ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Drawings.

END OF SECTION
10 28 00 - 4 Toilet Accessories
TP-475
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 10 44 00

FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide fire extinguisher cabinets with accessories as required for complete installation.

1. Fully Recessed: Provide flush mounted trimless fire extinguisher cabinets (no visible trim).

2. Semi-Recessed: Provide semi-recessed mounted fire extinguisher cabinets with exposed frame (trim); maximum 4” projection from finished wall surface.

3. Surface Mounted: Provide surface mounted fire extinguisher cabinets with exposed frame (trim) for garage and areas not in a path of travel.

4. Fire Extinguishers: Owner furnished and installed.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 21: Fire protection systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. J.L. Industries.

B. Larsen’s Manufacturing Co.

C. Potter Roemer.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Systems Description: Provide fire extinguisher cabinets with accessories.

1. 2.

3. Public Areas: Flush trimless fire extinguisher cabinets.

Back-of-House Areas: Semi-recessed exposed frame fire extinguisher cabinets.

Garage: Surface mounted exposed frame fire extinguisher cabinets.

B. Flush Trimless Fire Extinguisher Cabinets:
10 44 00 - 1 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
TP-476
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1. Type:
a.
b.
c.
d.

J.L. Industries/Embassy Series.

Larsen’s Mfg. Co./Occult Series.

Potter Roemer/Dana Series.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Cabinet Depth: Provide cabinets designed for space available in walls with fire extinguisher cabinets, and of sufficient depth to house 2A-10BC multi-purpose dry chemical type fire extinguisher.

3. Frame: Trimless with recessed door frame flush with finish wall.

4. Metal Gages: Manufacturer's standard for series specified.

5. Box: Provide manufacturer's standard box with white baked enamel interior finish and baked enamel exterior finish.

6. Doors: Steel, full flush metal panel, with break-glass or manufacturer’s standard similar secure access type panel; provide thermosetting primer compatible with finish specified in Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating.

7. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard for secured access fire extinguisher cabinets panel with inside latch and lock.

C. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets with Exposed Frame (Trim): Provide semi-recessed mounting unless otherwise indicated, with maximum 4” extension from face of wall, provide trim suitable for installation indicated.

1. Type:
a.
b.
c.
d.

J.L. Industries/Ambassador Series.

Larsen’s Mfg. Co./Architectural Series.

Potter Roemer/Alta Series.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2. Cabinet Depth: Provide cabinets designed for space available in walls with fire extinguisher cabinets, and of depth to house 2A-10BC multi-purpose dry chemical type fire extinguisher.

3. Food Preparation Areas: Provide cabinets designed to house K Type fire extinguisher at locations indicated on Drawings or designated as food preparation areas where burning grease could be encountered.

Hazardous Areas (Garage): Provide cabinets designed to house 4A-60BC multipurpose dry chemical type fire extinguisher at locations indicated on Drawings or designated as hazardous.

Trim: Manufacturer's standard edge trim for specified models.

4. 5.

6. Metal Gages: Provide manufacturer's standard gages for cabinets specified. 10 44 00 - 2 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
TP-477
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

7. Construction: Mitered and welded one-piece tubular door frames; weld joints and grind smooth; manufacturer's standard steel box with white baked enamel interior finish and primed exterior finish.
a.
b.
c.

Steel Doors and Trim: Manufacturer's standard, prime coat finished.

Doors: Break-glass type secured access, with inside latch and lock.

Door Hardware: Continuous hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.

D. Surface Mounted Fire Extinguisher Cabinets:

1. Types:
a.
b.
c.
d.

J.L. Industries/Ambassador Series.

Larsen’s Mfg. Co./Architectural Series.

Potter Roemer/Alta Series.

Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 62 00.

2. Cabinet Depth (Typical): Provide cabinets designed for space available in walls with fire extinguisher cabinets, and of depth to house 2A-10BC multi-purpose dry chemical type fire extinguisher.

3. Type: Fully exposed, mounted directly to wall, with manufacturer’s standard rolled edge trim based on specified cabinets.

4. Metal Gages: Provide cabinets fabricated of minimum 18-gage throughout, 20- gage permitted for back.

5. Construction: One-piece tubular door frames mitered and welded; weld joints and grind smooth; manufacturer's standard steel box with white baked enamel interior finish and primed exterior finish.
a.
b.
c.

Steel Doors and Trim: Manufacturer's standard, prime coat finished.

Doors: Break-glass or similar secured access panel, with inside latch and lock.

Door Hardware: Continuous type hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which fire extinguisher cabinets are to be installed.

B. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cabinets in locations and at mounting height to comply with requirements of governing authorities; prepare recesses in walls as required.

Securely fasten to structure, square and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B.

1. Wherever exact location of units is not shown, locate as directed by Architect. 10 44 00 - 3 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
TP-478
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. After installation and finishing is completed, silkscreen or apply decal letters spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" as applicable.

B. Letter size, style and location as selected by Architect.

END OF SECTION
10 44 00 - 4 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
TP-479
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 10 51 00

SOLID PHENOLIC LOCKERS
Part 1 GENERAL

1.1 Summary
A. Section includes:
solid phenolic lockers
solid phenolic benches
B. Related Sections:

1.2 Submittals
A. Submittals: Comply with procedures and quantities as indicated in Division 1 Submittal Procedure Section.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating room sizes, layout, locker dimensions, material thickness, trim, hardware, finishes, locks, base, doors, accessories, and installation details.

C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for materials, fabrication, finishing, fastenings, hardware, and installation details.

D.

E.

Samples: Submit samples of edge details, colors, patterns, finishes, and textures.

Closeout Documents: Submit the following:

1. Operation and Maintenance data

2. Warranty

1.3 Quality Assurance
A. Qualifications:

1. Fabricator shall have 10 years or more experience in fabrication of solid phenolic materials and shall be experienced in performing work of similar size and scope.

2. Fabricator shall be capable of providing field service representation.

3. Installer shall be approved by the manufacturer and be experienced in performing work of similar size and scope.

B. Pre Installation Meeting: Conduct pre-installation meeting prior to installation to verify project requirements and conditions.

1.4 Delivery, Storage and Handling
10 21 20 - 1 Solid Phenolic Lockers
TP-480
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
A. Ordering: Comply with supplier’s ordering and lead-time guidelines to avoid delays.

B. Delivery: Deliver materials in the manufacturer’s original protective packaging.

C. Storage and Handling: Store materials in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage, temperature, humidity, and exposure to the elements.

1.5 Coordination and Project Conditions
A. Field Measurements: Before material fabrication, verify actual field measurements and show actual measurements on shop drawings.

B. Coordination: Coordinate field measurements with fabrication schedule construction progress to avoid construction delays.

1.6 Warranty
A. Submit executed copy of 10-year warranty against defects in material and 2 years warranty for system.

Part 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers
A. Basis of Design: Spectrum Lockers; 885 Milner Ave. Toronto, Ontario M1B 5V8 Phone: 1-855-444-0588; spectrumlockers.com.

Locally Represented by:

MEGA ARCHITECTURAL: Address: 6861 Walker St, La Palma CA 90623, T: (310) 323-5828 a. Model: as indicated in plans, mixed sizes: 1-Tier, 2-Tier, 3-Tier, ,4-Tier, 5-Tier, 6-Tier, Z-Tier
B. Hollman
C. Foreman
D. Substitutions per division 01:

2.2 Materials (Basis of Design)
A. Panel Material:

1. Decorative papers impregnated with the melamine resin on faces with a clear protective overcoat and integrally compression molded within a core consisting of solid phenolic impregnated kraft papers.

2. Core or panel material shall meet fire resistance per ASTM E84 , Class B 10 21 20 - 2 Solid Phenolic Lockers
TP-481
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
B. Doors:

1. Material: 1/2” (13mm) thick solid phenolic composite material.

2. Corners: Rounded

3. Color: As selected from Trespa TopLab’s full color range, basis of design includes mix of colors: Brittany Blue, Dove Grey, Indigo.

4. Edges: Standard profile is straight edge no profile.

5. Door Fastening: Through Bolted.

C. Locker Bodies

1. Exposed edges: Straight profile; eased edges to remove sharpness; machine polished and free from tooling imperfections.

2. Tops, bottoms, and intermediate shelves: 1/2” (13mm) thick solid phenolic composite material with ventilation holes.

3. Locker backs: +/- 1/4” (6mm) thick solid composite material.

4. Locker Sides: 3/8” (10mm) thick solid phenolic composite material.

5. Made from Trespa Toplab Base, E0-00 White
D. Ancillary Panels: Finished end panels and closures shall be 1/2” (13mm) thick solid phenolic composite material.

E. Hardware

1. Hinges:
a. Material: 304-grade stainless steel.
b. Quantity: Three (3) for full height doors and two (2) for multi-tier units.

2. Interior hooks:
a. Material: Stainless steel.
b. Top Hook: Two prong: one per opening for 1, 2, and “Z” tiers. c. Side Hook: Single prong: two per opening for 1, 2, and “Z” tiers.

3. Fasteners: Exposed fasteners, where present, shall be 304 stainless steel

4. Fastener Application: Apply directly into or through the material.

5. Other Reinforcement: Aluminum or metal profiles for reinforcements shall not be permitted.

6. Door Identification (identification plates): 1 1/2" stainless steel disk with laser engraved numbering, or visible on integrated hasp handle F. Ventilation

1. Interior Vent: Provide six 3/8” (10mm) diameter ventilation holes on tops, bottoms, and intermediate shelves. Provide three 3/8” (10mm) diameter ventilation holes on “Z” type intermediary shelves.
10 21 20 - 3 Solid Phenolic Lockers
TP-482
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
G. Base

1. Base not furnished with Locker: (Curb mounted)

2.3 Size
A. Overall Height: 71-3/4” or as indicated.

B. Overall Width: Mix of widths: 12”, 16”, or 18” as indicated.

C. Overall Depth: 15”

2.4 Accessories and Options
A. Locking System: (Stainless Steel Hasp Plate and Bar with Integrated Handle) (Digilock Cue Nextlock) (Ojmar Standard Security Cam Key Lock) (Ojmar Coin Collect or Return).

B. Locker Top: Vertical Panel width ¼” (6mm) thick solid phenolic composite material, top of lockers to ceiling as indicted.

C. Door Identification:

1. Number Plates: (Identification plates to be stainless steel with laser engraved numbers and mounted into machined door pocket with permanent adhesive) (Identification laser engraved on integrated hasp handle).

2. Fonts to be a minimum 1/2” high and up to four alphanumeric characters

3. Numbering sequence to be provided by architect.

Part 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 Examination: Examine site conditions before locker installation. Notify architect of unacceptable areas. Do not install locker until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.

3.2 Installation
A. Install lockers in locations as shown on shop drawings per manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Install lockers plumb, level, square, rigid, and flush.

C. Install all required trim, fillers, end panels, and closures per manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Use hardware supplied or recommended by the manufacturer. 10 21 20 - 4 Solid Phenolic Lockers
TP-483
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
E. Attach number plates to doors as indicated on shop drawings.

F. Correct and/or replace damaged components as directed by architect.

3.3 Adjustment
A.

B.

Adjust doors and locks for smooth operation without binding.

Lubricate door hinges and locks per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.4 Cleaning
A. Clean all surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Do not use abrasive cleaners.

End of Section
10 21 20 - 5 Solid Phenolic Lockers
TP-484
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
SECTION 11 10 00

MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide miscellaneous equipment with hardware and accessories as required for complete secure and operational installation as applicable.

1. 2.

Provide and install (3) microwaves.

Provide and install (2) refrigerators. Fridge shall be side by side or freezer on bottom type.

Provide and install (2) garbage disposals.

Provide and install monitor systems per client direction.

Provide and install (1) residential grade dishwasher.

Provide and install (1) ice maker.

Provide and install (1) dual coffee maker with hot water tap.

Provide and install (1) 36” range.

Provide and install (1) 42” range hood.

Provide and install (3) 48” wide 2-tier stainless steel, mobile, wire shelving units.

Provide and install (1) 24” stand up freezer.

Provide and install (1) 36” stand up refrigerator.

3. 4.

5. 6.

7. 8.

9. 10.

11. 12.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 26: Electrical service.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Show complete details of equipment including dimensions and field measurements.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to jobsite at appropriate time for building in.

B. Do not deliver miscellaneous equipment to site until spaces in which they are to be installed are ready to receive them.

C. Pack miscellaneous equipment individually, protect each item and its finish.

1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces from damage during installation of work of this section.

B. Before starting work notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to installation or operation of units.
11 10 00 - 1 Miscellaneous Equipment
TP-485
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
C. Verify with Architect exact location of miscellaneous equipment.

1.5 WARRANTY
D. Extended Correction Period: Repair or replace miscellaneous equipment which does not function as intended.

1. Period: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide miscellaneous equipment with hardware and accessories as applicable.

B. Regulatory Requirements - Access for Persons with Disabilities: Comply with California Building Standards Code and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards.

C. General: Provide standard materials and finishes for miscellaneous equipment listed; where more than one material or finish is available and not otherwise indicated provide as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard materials and finishes.

D. Attachments and Accessories: Provide for complete secure operational installation.

E. Microwave: Energy Star rated, General Electric, allow $300 each F. Refrigerator: Energy Star rated, Kitchen Aid, allow $2,400 each G. Garbage disposal: Energy Star rated, InSinkErator, allow $200 each H. TV/monitor system: As stated in the bid addendum
I. Dishwasher: Energy star rated, Kitchen Aid, allow $1,700 J. Ice maker: Energy star rated, Manitowoc, allow $5,500 K. Coffee maker: Bunn BrewWIST Dual GPR DBC, allow $3,500 L. Range: Energy star rated, Kitchen Aid, allow $6,000
M. Range hood: Energy star rated, Kitchen Aid, allow $2,500 N. SS wire shelving: allow $200 each
O. 24” freezer: Energy star rated, True, allow $5,000
P. 36” refrigerator: Energy star rated, True, allow $4,500 11 10 00 - 2 Miscellaneous Equipment
TP-486
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install miscellaneous equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions, level, true to line, and in correct relation to adjacent materials and finishes.

B. Coordinate electrical connections with Division 26.

C. Upon completion of installation, instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of electrical miscellaneous equipment.

END OF SECTION
11 10 00 - 3 Miscellaneous Equipment
TP-487
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 11 66 13

EXERCISE EQUIPMENT
PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
GENERAL SPECS:

STEEL STRUCTURE AND COMPONENTS

1. Steel structure: Carbon steel tubes with thickness of 3mm or 4mm and a standard of 35-8 or 45-8 (ASTM Grade B)

2. Welding: MIG welding with hollow coil feed.

3. Screws: All from 304 stainless steel. Anti-temper S-TORX head / special signature screws are used when necessary.

COATING SYSTEM

4. Galvanization: In accordance with ASTMB633-07 standard, electro galvanization provides surface rust protection and superior color adhesion.

5. Coating: DUPONT ALESTA AD Powder coating for architectural use. Made from carboxyl polyester and TIGC. Designed particularly for all the classic requirements of outdoor exposure: rain, fog, UV from sunlight and SO2-containing air. Film thickness: 60 to 70 microns.

COMPOSITES

6. HDPE: Backrests, armrests, seats are made with signature molds for HDPE. Raw material includes UV protection which retains its color for at least 2 years and allows easier maintenance with higher durability.

7. PU-Polyurethane: Backrests, armrests, seats are made with signature molds for Greenfields Professional Series. Raw material includes UV protection which retains its color for at least 2 years and allows easier maintenance with higher durability and comfort. 116613-1 Exercise Equipment
TP-488
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

GREENFIELDS APP

8. Greenfields App: For both Android and Apple phones, offers the following features:
- Park locator within 30 mile radius
- QR Code Scanner – scan view info on each unit
- Instructional Videos - how-to videos for exercises available on each unit - My Workout Routine – create your own workouts
- Progress – Workout History: keep track of your personal performance over time - Progress – Weight Progress: keep track of your weight progress towards your goal - Progress – Personal BMI: keep track of Body Mass Index progress toward your goal - Coming soon: Exercises not requiring equipment

UNIT SELECTION FOR THIS PROJECT
GR2005-1-19 - 2-Person Incline Sit-Up Bench
x
x
x
x
x
x
Pre-Galvanized tubes
Cold Galvanized after fabrication
Orange Peel DuPont Powder Coating with UV protection
Greenfields’ installation method - eliminates obstacles and trip hazards Modular HDPE boards offer low heat conductivity
HDPE Sit-Up board overall size is 17.5" wide x 43" long (1.75" thick) and offers great support for users of all sizes
Detailed User Instructions, including a QR Code featuring a "How To" video 10 Year Limited Warranty
x
x
GR2005-1-22 - 4-Pendulum Abs & Dips Station
x
x
x
x
x
Pre-Galvanized tubes
Cold Galvanized after fabrication
Orange Peel DuPont Powder Coating with UV protection
Greenfields’ installation method eliminates obstacles and trip hazards Built-in SafeStop range limiter inside pendulum arm to protect user and equipment stops motion at 60 degrees.
2RS Sealed ball-bearings are used (not bushings) - with life cycle of 10,000 hours. (Bearings feature a rubber seal on both sides. RS provides a better seal but more rolling friction than 2Z bearings)
Hand Grips use 3" diameter to prevent protrusion (3" large diameter, 6 inch long, 1.75" thick)
Two Kick-Steps to allow easier user position of the leg/knee raises station (Abs) HDPE backrest offers low heat conductivity.

HDPE arm rests offer low heat conductivity
Detailed User Instructions, including a QR Code featuring "How To" video 10 Year Limited Warranty
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
116613-2 Exercise Equipment
TP-489
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SGR2005-1-42 - 2-Person Back & Arms Combo (unique to Greenfields) x
x
x
x
x
Pre-Galvanized tubes
Cold Galvanized after fabrication
Orange Peel DuPont Powder Coating with UV protection
Greenfields’ installation method eliminates obstacles and trip hazards 2RS Sealed ball-bearings are used (not bushings) - with life cycle of 10,000 hours. (Bearings feature a rubber seal on both sides. RS provides a better seal but more rolling friction than 2Z bearings)
Hand Grips use 3" diameter to prevent protrusion (3" large diameter, 6 inch long, 1.75" thick)
Ergonomic HDPE Backrest offers low heat conductivity, while providing better support HDPE Seats offer low heat conductivity
Under-seat footrest for optimal leverage and injury prevention Detailed User Instructions, including a QR Code featuring "How To" video Separate Age Appropriate Sign mounted on the main post
10 Year Limited Warranty
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
SGR2005-1-48-W - 2-Person Wheelchair Accessible Lat Pull Down (unique to Greenfields) x
x
x
x
x
x
Pre-Galvanized tubes
Cold Galvanized after fabrication
Orange Peel DuPont Powder Coating with UV protection
Greenfields’ installation method eliminates obstacles and trip hazards Accessible Side supports a counter weight of 138 lbs.
2RS Sealed ball-bearings are used (not bushings) - with life cycle of 10,000 hours. (Bearings feature a rubber seal on both sides. RS provides a better seal but more rolling friction than 2Z bearings)
Hand Grips use 3" diameter to prevent protrusion (3" large diameter, 6 inch long, 1.75" thick)
Ergonomic HDPE Backrests offer low heat conductivity, while providing better support HDPE Seats offer low heat conductivity
Under-seat footrest for optimal leverage and injury prevention Detailed User Instructions, including a QR Code featuring "How To" video Separate Age Appropriate Sign mounted on the main post
Universal ADA Sign mounted on the main post
10 Year Limited Warranty
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x U.S. Patent 9,079,069 B1
HP2009-5-03 - Single Elliptical Cross Trainer
x
x
x
x
x
Pre-Galvanized tubes
Cold Galvanized after fabrication
Orange Peel DuPont Powder Coating with UV protection
Greenfields’ installation method eliminates obstacles and trip hazards 2RS Sealed ball-bearings are used (not bushings) - with life cycle of 10,000 hours. (Bearings feature a rubber seal on both sides. RS provides a better seal but more rolling friction than 2Z bearings)
116613-3 Exercise Equipment
TP-490
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
x Hand Grips use 3" diameter to prevent protrusion (3" large diameter, 6 inch long, 1.75" thick)
Ergonomic HDPE Footrests offer low heat conductivity, while providing better support Detailed User Instructions, including a QR Code featuring "How To" video on a standalone sign
10 Year Limited Warranty
x
x
x
UBX-292 – Cardio Stepper with Adjustable Resistance (unique to Greenfields) x
x
x
x
x
Pre-Galvanized tubes
Cold Galvanized after fabrication
Orange Peel DuPont Powder Coating with UV protection
Greenfields’ installation method eliminates obstacles and trip hazards Handles are made in signature molds from durable and a fire resistant EPDM soft rubber.

Resistance mechanism consists of a Bi-Directional Hydraulic Piston with resistance of up to 100 lbs.

Ergonomic HDPE footrests offer low heat conductivity, while providing better support Detailed User Instructions, including a QR Code featuring "How To" video Separate Age Appropriate Sign mounted on the main post
10 Year Limited Warranty
x
x
x
x
x
UBX-293 – Bench Press with Adjustable Resistance (unique to Greenfields) x
x
x
x
x
Pre-Galvanized tubes
Cold Galvanized after fabrication
Orange Peel DuPont Powder Coating with UV protection
Greenfields’ installation method eliminates obstacles and trip hazards Handles are made in signature molds, from durable and a fire resistant EPDM soft rubber.

Resistance mechanism consists of a Bi-Directional Hydraulic Piston with resistance of up to 100 lbs.

Customized PU-Polyurethane backrests offer great comfort while in use.

Detailed User Instructions, including a QR Code featuring "How To" video.

Separate Age Appropriate Sign mounted on the main post
10 Year Limited Warranty
x
x
x
x
x
116613-4 Exercise Equipment
TP-491
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
SECTION 12 24 00

WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide manual chain operated window shades with brackets and accessories as required for complete finished operational installation.

1. Solar Shades: Unframed.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 701: Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films.

B. FS CCC-T-191b: Flame Retardancy of Textiles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature.

B. Shop Drawings: Show hardware, clearances and operation of shades with specified system.

1. Layout of openings, partings and pulley positions subject to Architect approval where not clearly indicated.

C. Samples: Submit samples of each fabric indicating finishing of top, bottom and sides, and section of frame indicating finish.

D. Certificate of Flame Proofing or Flame Resistance: Submit certification, recommendations and instructions for laundering of specified fabrics and maintenance of entire installation.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide manual shades as complete units produced by one manufacturer, including hardware, accessory items, mounting brackets and fastenings.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver shades until building is ready for installation.

B. Number and identify shades as to locations in Project.

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Before installation, physically measure and inspect space after limiting conditions are established.
12 24 00 - 1 Window Shades
TP-492
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023

1. Note floor and ceiling may not be level.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Mecho Shade Corporation/Mecho Shade System.

B. Lutron Electronics Co./Manual Shading.

C. SKYCO Shading Systems, Inc./Manual Shades.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide manual chain operated window shades with brackets and accessories as required for complete finished operational installation.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Flame Retardant Materials: Approved by California State Fire Marshal's Office.

2. Fire Resistant Fabrics: Required to have passed one of following:
a.
b.

NFPA 701.

FS CCC-T-191, test 5903.

C. Shade Operating System: Manual type chain operated roller shade system with adjustable slip clutch.

D. Fabric:

1. Solar Shades: Manufacturer's standard fire-resistant glass cloth fabric.

2. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

E. Accessories: Provide accessories, brackets, fittings and fastenings as necessary for proper operation and installation of shades; conceal fasteners or finish flush, painted to match exposed metal finish.

F. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide custom color as directed by Architect.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Center Seams: Use single widths of fabric with no center seams for each shade.

B. Shade Mounting System: Allow for shade removal and replacement without disassembling hardware assembly.
12 24 00 - 2 Window Shades
TP-493
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 10/12/2023
C. Operating System: Provide upper and lower stop limits to prevent over-winding and unrolling.

1. Provide for left or right-hand operation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect site conditions prior to installation for conditions that could affect proper installation and operation of shades.

B. Beginning installation signifies acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install shades in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.

1. Install shades level, plumb, secure, and at proper height; cooperate with other trades for securing shades to substrate and finished surfaces.

2. Mount solar shades and blackout shades as indicated on Drawings to allow shade cloths to be adjacent.

B. Hang shades to be straight and even, employing hand sewing of seams and hems as necessary for carefully matched installation with even, horizontal top and bottom hems, and quiet, smoothly operating system.

C. Fabricate and install shades so when open, closed or while operating shades will not be abraded by window frame, ceiling or sill.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Thirty days after hanging of shades, inspect installation for fabric shrinkage or expansion or other variations and rehang as necessary for conformance to specified tolerances.

END OF SECTION
12 24 00 - 3 Window Shades
TP-494
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
SECTION 12 93 00

SITE FURNISHINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
All labor, materials equipment necessary for and incidental to performing all operations of work for this Section, complete as shown on the Plans or specified herein. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

A. Picnic Tables
B. Accessible Picnic Table
C. Round Tables with Seating
D. Bench Seating
E. Waste / Recycling Receptacles
F. Drinking Fountain
G. Precast Concrete Pots

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 32 13 13 Concrete Paving

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. General
Examine Plans and Specifications and include all miscellaneous metal, which is specified in other Sections. Provide all connections, anchors, bolts, and other fastenings as required. Perform all cutting, punching, drilling, and tapping required for proper assembly of the work. All installations shall be done in accordance to manufacturer’s specifications.

B. Shop Drawings
Submit shop drawings of all work herein showing layouts, sizes, and methods of construction and installation, including sizes and types of all fastening devices.

C. Codes
129300-1 Site Furnishings
TP-495
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
Materials and work shall conform to the governing Building Code. In case of conflict between these Specifications and the Building Code, the more stringent shall govern.

D. Delivery
Ensure that items to be set in concrete or in play areas are delivered at the proper time.

E. Measurements
Verify all dimensions by taking field measurements. Proper fit and attachment of all items is required.

F. Coordination
Coordinate with other trades to effect prompt delivery of all materials needed for erection or installation. Identify all bolts or other loose materials.

G. Storage
Store materials in dry, protected areas. Protect from rusting, bleaching, and other damage. Remove any damaged items from site and replace at no cost to the City.

H. Certifications
Furnish to the City’s representative copies of all material certifications.

I. Trade Names or Equals
Approval of equipment and materials offered as equivalents to those specified will be as set forth under Section 4, paragraph 4-1.6 of the Standard Specifications.

Submit 6s x6s color and finish sample for each site furnishing specified, except where noted under item B.

J.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 Tables
A. Picnic tables shall be ‘525 Table’, Model No. 525-60TX; by Dumor. Tel: (818) 735-3838. Surface mount with tamper-resistant fasteners. Picnic tables shall be Antique Mahogany (Wood grain recycled plastic) and Textured Gray (Powder coated metal components) in color.

B. Accessible picnic tables shall be ‘525 ADA Table’, Model No. 525-633TX; by Dumor. Tel: (818) 735-3838. Surface mount with tamper-resistant fasteners. 129300-2 Site Furnishings
TP-496
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
Picnic tables shall be Antique Mahogany (Wood grain recycled plastic) and Textured Gray (Powder coated metal components) in color.

C. Round tables with seating shall be ‘42” Dia. Steel Table with 3 Seats’, Model No. 296-42-30TX/S2 by Dumor. Tel: (818) 735-3838. Surface mount with tamper-resistant fasteners. Picnic tables shall be Antique Mahogany (Wood grain recycled plastic) and Textured Gray (Powder coated metal components) in color.

2.2 Benches
A. Bench seating shall be ‘6’ Backless Bench’, Model No. 523-60TX by Dumor.

Tel: (818) 735-3838. Surface mount with tamper-resistant fasteners. Picnic tables shall be Antique Mahogany (Wood grain recycled plastic) and Textured Gray (Powder coated metal components) in color.

2.3 Waste / Recycling Receptacles
A. Waste receptacle shall be ‘32 Gallon Waste Receptacle with Liner Shield’, Model No. 287-32SH-SO; provide with Textured Gray ‘SO’ lid option, ‘SO’ hole shape option by Dumor. Tel: (818) 735-3838. Surface mount with tamperresistant fasteners. Receptacles shall be Textured Gray (Powder coated metal components) in color.

B. Recycling receptacle shall be ‘32 Gallon Mixed Recycling Receptacle with Liner Shield’, Model No. 287-32SH-RC0002; provide with Textured Gray ‘RC2’ lid option, ‘RC2’ hole shape option by Dumor. Tel: (818) 735-3838.

Surface mount with tamper-resistant fasteners. Receptacles shall be Textured Gray (Powder coated metal components) in color.

2.4 Drinking Fountain
A. Drinking fountain shall be ‘ADA Accessible Hi-Lo Filtered Stainless Steel Drinking Fountain with Bottle Filler, Non-Refrigerated’ Model No. 3612F by Haws. Tel: (909) 594-7088. Surface mount with tamper-resistant fasteners.

Drinking fountain shall be Stainless Steel with Silver Powder Coat in color.

2.5 Precast Concrete Pots
A. Drinking fountain shall be ‘30” Square Wedge Pot’, Model No. QS-WE3037P by QCP Corp. Tel: (951) 256-3221. Precast concrete pots shall be French Gray in color with Craftmans Etch finish.
129300-3 Site Furnishings
TP-497
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 08/22/2023
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Prior to work of this Section, carefully inspect previously installed work. Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

B. Verify that work of this Section may be installed in strict accordance with the original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions of the referenced standards.

C. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Engineer.

D. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Dimensions upon which Work of this Section may be contingent are to be verified by the Contractor at the work site to ensure proper placement and fit of equipment in the allotted areas.

B. Set and install site furnishings plumb, level, and true to line with a neat and finished appearance and in
printed instructions.
accordance with approved submittal and manufacturer’s

END OF SECTION
129300-4 Site Furnishings
TP-498
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023
SECTION 13 10 10

POOL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes formwork, reinforcement, accessories, cast-in place concrete, finishing and curing for swimming pool floor.

B. Concrete work shall conform to ACI 301 except as modified below.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for admixtures, reinforcing steel, epoxy, non-shrink grout, and waterstops.

B. Design Data: Submit concrete mix design.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Construct and erect concrete formwork in accordance with ACI 301 and 347.

B. Perform concrete reinforcing work in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 318, and Manual of Practice.

C. Perform cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with ACI 301.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Form Materials: At the discretion of the Contractor.

B. Plywood: PS 1, MDO, Douglas Fir species; Structural 1 grade; sound undamaged sheets with clean true edges.

C. Lumber: Douglas Fir species; #1 grade.

D. Form Ties: Snap-off, glass fiber type of fixed length, or cone type.

E. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil which will not stain concrete or impair natural bonding characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete.

F. Formed Construction Joints for Slab-on-Grade as shown on drawings. 13 10 10 - 1 Pool Concrete
TP-499
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023

2.2 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 40ksi yield grade for #3 and 60 ksi yield grade for #4 and larger; deformed billet steel bars, plain finish.

B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for support of reinforcing.

C. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with ACI 315.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II, Normal, Portland type.

B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: Use 1 inch coarse aggregate conforming to ASTM C33 Size #5 and comply with Title 24, Section 1903A.3.

C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.

D. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260.

2.4 CONCRETE MIX
A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.

B. Provide concrete with 4,000 psi compressive strength with a maximum slump of 4 inches for all flatwork.

C. Select mix design proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with Title 24, Section 1905.2.

2.5 COMPOUNDS, HARDENERS AND SEALERS
A. Curing Compounds: ASTM C309.

B. Absorptive Mats: ASTM C171.

C. Sealers: Clear, non-yellowing, penetrating sealer; Aqua Mix, Inc., Sealer’s Choice, or approved equal.

2.6 EPOXY
A. Cartridge type two-component 100% solids epoxy based system dispensed and mixed through a static mixing nozzle supplied by the manufacturer and meeting requirements of ASTM C-881 Type I and IV with 14,830 psi minimum compressive strength. The epoxy shall be tested for use in cracked and uncracked concrete per ICC-ES AC308.

B. Model SET-XP manufactured by Simpson Strong -Tie.
13 10 10 - 2 Pool Concrete
TP-500
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023

2.7 NON-SHRINK GROUT REPAIR MORTAR
A. Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents with minimum compressive strength of 9,000 psi at 28 days and suitable for concrete repair applications from featheredge to 4 inch depth.

B. Model Rapid Set Cement All manufactured by CTS Cement Manufacturing.

PART 3 - EXECUTIONS

3.1 FORMWORK ERECTION
A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements.

B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork.

C. Apply form release agent to formwork prior to placing form accessories and reinforcement.

D. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings which are affected by agent.

E. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter.

3.2 INSERTS, EMBEDDED COMPONENTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for work to be embedded in and passing through concrete members.

B. Coordinate work of other sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts.

C. Install concrete accessories straight, level, and plumb.

3.3 REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT
A. Place reinforcement, supported and secured against displacement.

B. Ensure reinforcing is clean, free of loose scale, dirt, or other foreign coatings.

3.4 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Prepare previously placed concrete as indicated.

B. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur

3.5 FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads.

B. Remove formwork progressively and in accordance with code requirements. 13 10 10 - 3 Pool Concrete
TP-501
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023

3.6 FLOOR FINISHING
A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.

B. Uniformly spread, screed, and float concrete.

C. Provide straight coarse broom finish on pool floor slabs.

D. Maintain surface flatness, with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

E. In areas with drains, maintain floor level at walls and slope surfaces uniformly to drains.

3.7 CURING
A. Apply curing compounds on floor surfaces.

B. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying.

C. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete for not less than 7 days.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Three (3) Concrete Test Cylinders: Taken for 50 cubic yards of each class of concrete placed
B. One (1) Slump Test: Taken for each set of test cylinders taken.

3.9 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required lines, details and elevations, as directed by Engineer.

END OF SECTION
13 10 10 - 4 Pool Concrete
TP-502
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023
SECTION 13 10 11

POOL SHOTCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes supply and installation of wet mix pneumatically applied concrete, formwork, reinforcement, accessories, finishing, and curing for swimming pool wall structure.

B. Concrete work shall conform to ACI 301 except as modified below.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for reinforcing steel.

B. Design Data: Submit concrete mix design and provide shotcrete trip tickets.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with Title 24, Section 1908A of the California Building Code and ACI (American Concrete Institute) 506.2 unless specified otherwise in this Section.

B. Construct and erect concrete formwork and concrete reinforcing work in accordance with ACI 301, unless specified otherwise in this Section.

C. Prior to start of work, Owner's Testing Laboratory will verify mix proportions, gradation, and quality of aggregate.

D. Test Panels: Contractor shall provide 1 test panel fabricated by placing shotcrete onto plywood for each mix design being considered, for each shooting position to be encountered, and for each 5000 square feet of placed shotcrete. Panels shall be of identical thickness, reinforcement, and reinforcement placement as required for Work.

E. Core samples shall be tested for strength, water absorption, and drying and shrinkage.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Ensure materials and surrounding air temperature are a minimum 50 degrees Fahrenheit prior to, during, and 7 days after completion of work. 13 10 11 - 1 Pool Shotcrete
TP-503
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023
B. During freezing or near freezing weather, provide equipment and cover to maintain minimum 50 degrees Fahrenheit and to protect work completed or work in progress.

C. Suspend shotcrete operations during high winds, rainy weather, or near freezing temperatures when work cannot be protected.

1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT
A. Mixing Equipment: Capable of thoroughly mixing aggregate, cement, and water in sufficient quantity to maintain continuous placement.

B. Air Supply: Clean, dry air adequate for maintaining sufficient nozzle velocity, uniformly steady for work while simultaneously operating blow pipe for cleaning away rebound.

C. Delivery Equipment: Capable of discharging aggregate-cement-water mixture accurately, uniformly, and continuously.

2.2 FORM MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Form Materials: At the discretion of the Contractor.

B. Plywood: PS 1-83, Group I, Exterior Grade B-B, minimum 5 ply, and 5/8 inch thick, grade marked, and not mill oiled.

C. Lumber: Douglas Fir species; #1 grade.

D. Form Ties: Prefabricated rod, flat band, wire, internally threaded disconnected type, and not leaving metal within 1-1/2 inches of shotcrete surface.

E. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil which will not stain shotcrete.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 40ksi yield grade for #3 and 60 ksi yield grade for #4 and larger; deformed billet steel bars, plain finish.

B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for support of reinforcing.

C. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with ACI 315.

2.4 SHOTRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II, Normal, Portland type.

B. Coarse Aggregates: Conforming to ASTM C-33.
13 10 11 - 2 POOL SHOTCRETE
TP-504
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023
C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.

2.5 CONCRETE MIX
A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.

B. Provide shotcrete with 4,000 psi compressive strength with a minimum slump of 1 ½ inches maximum slump of 2 ½ inches.

C. Thoroughly mix shotcrete. Place mix within 45 minutes of mixing.

D. Develop mix design to give good compaction and low percentage of rebound, but stiff enough not to sag.

E. Maintain quality control records during production of shotcrete. Make records available to Owner's Testing Laboratory.

PART 3 - EXECUTIONS

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

B. Verify field measurements are as indicated.

C. Verify fabricated forms are true to line and dimension, adequately braced against vibration, and constructed to permit escape of air and rebound during gunning operations.

D. Ensure correct placement of reinforcement. Ensure sufficient clearance around reinforcement to permit complete encasement.

E. Ensure easy access to shotcrete surfaces for screeding and finishing, to permit uninterrupted application.

3.2 ALLIGNMENT CONTROL
A. Provide alignment wires to establish thickness and plane of required surfaces.

B. Install alignment wires at corners and offsets not established by forms.

C. Tighten alignment wires true to line. Position adjustment devices to permit additional tightening.

3.3 FORMWORK ERECTION
A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements.

B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork.

C. Apply form release agent to formwork prior to placing form accessories and reinforcement.
13 10 11 - 3 Pool Shotcrete
TP-505
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023
D. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings which are affected by agent.

E. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter.

3.4 INSERTS, EMBEDDED COMPONENTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for work to be embedded in and passing through concrete members.

B. Coordinate work of other sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts.

C. Install concrete accessories straight, level, and plumb.

3.5 REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT
A. Place reinforcement, supported and secured against displacement.

B. Ensure reinforcing is clean, free of loose scale, dirt, or other foreign coatings.

3.6 PLACING SHOTCRETE
A. Do not place shotcrete on any surface that is frozen, spongy, or where there is free water.

B. Apply shotcrete not to sag.

C. Direct nozzle perpendicular to surface to ensure maximum compaction with minimum rebound.

D. Build up thickness by layers, in multiple passes of the nozzle over the work area.

Cover reinforcement with the first layer.

E. Allow each layer to take initial set before applying succeeding layers.

F. After initial set of final layer, remove excess material outside of forms and alignment lines.

G. Clean with air-water jet to remove laitance.

H. Sound work with hammer for voids. Expose voids and replace with new shotcrete.

I. Remove trapped rebound at construction and expansion joints.

J. Remove rebound material which does not fall clear of work. Discard rebound.

K. Finish surface of final layer with rough finish for mechanical bond at plaster areas and trowel finish in gutter.

L. Maintain surfaces wet for minimum of 7 days.
13 10 11 - 4 POOL SHOTCRETE
TP-506
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023

3.7 FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads.

B. Remove formwork progressively and in accordance with code requirements.

3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Immediately after placement, protect shotcrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

B. Maintain shotcrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of shotcrete.

END OF SECTION
13 10 11 - 5 Pool Shotcrete
TP-507
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023
SECTION 13 11 13

POOL FINISHES AND WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes pool gutter and surge chamber fluid applied waterproofing, pool plaster, and pool tile.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for all products listed in this Section B. Design Data: Submit plaster mix design.

C. Samples: Submit for each type, size, and color of tile listed.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for pool plaster and fluid applied waterproofing.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with TCA (Tile Council of America) Handbook and ANSI (American National Standards Institute) A108 Series/A118 Series.

1.5 EXTENDED WARRANTY
A. Provide 5-year warranty for pool plaster finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GUTTER, MAIN DRAIN BASIN AND SURGE CHAMBER FLUID APPLIED

WATERPROOFING
A. Cementitious crystalline waterproofing coating designed for concrete substrates with a blend of portland cement, fine treated silica sand and active chemicals. The active chemicals shall generate a non-soluble crystalline formation of dendritic fibers within the concrete to seal against water penetration. Coating shall be resistant to pool chemicals and certified to meet NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) Standard 61 for use with potable water.

B. Xypex Concentrate manufactured by Xypex Chemical Corporation. 13 11 13 - 1 Pool Finishes & Waterproofing
TP-508
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023

2.2 POOL PLASTER
A. Factory blended quartz aggregate with fortified white cement, additives, and field mixed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Pebble Sheen Arctic White manufactured by Pebble Technology International.

2.3 POOL TILE
A. Porcelain body, square edges, 0 to 0.5 percent moisture absorption, and conforming to ANSI/TCA A137.1. Surface finish, size, and color as scheduled.

B. Ceramic body, square edges, 0.5 to 3.0 percent moisture absorption, and conforming to ANSI/TCA A137.1. Surface finish, size, and color as scheduled C. Mortar: ANSI/ACI (American Concrete Institute) A118.1; Portland cement, sand, and water.

D. Grout: Cementitious type, resistant to shrinking.

2.4 POOL TILE SCHEDULE
A. Tile colors listed in this schedule are from the following manufacturers:

1. 2.

Dal-Tile Corporation (DT).

Inlays, Inc. (II).

B. Pool Deck:

1. Deck Depth Markers - Unglazed porcelain, 6 x 6 inch, white background with black 4-inch-high text and factory skid-resistant surface (II #C6200xx FT and #6205xx IN Series).

No Diving Graphic - Unglazed porcelain, 6 x 6 inch, white background with red international “no diving” graphic, black text and factory skid-resistant surface (II #C621500 Custom MG Series).

Rim Flow Gutter - Unglazed ceramic, 2 x 2 inch, C701 trim, and Waterfall (DT #D169) and Galaxy (DT #D023) color.

Rim Flow Gutter Cap - Unglazed ceramic, 2 x 1 inch, C701 trim, and Galaxy (DT #D023) color.

Rim Flow Gutter Cap Turn Target - Unglazed ceramic, 2 x 1 inch, C701 trim, and Black (DT #D311) color.

2. 3.

4. 5.

C. Pool Interior

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. Floor Inlet - Unglazed ceramic, 2 x 2 inch, and White (DT #D617) color Lane Marker - Unglazed ceramic, 2 x 2 inch, and Black (DT #D311) color.

Pool Step - Unglazed ceramic, 2 x 2 inch, and White (DT #D617) color.

Slope Break - Unglazed ceramic, 2 x 2 inch, and Red (DT #D017) color.

Step Edge - Unglazed ceramic, 2 x 2 inch with 2 x 1 inch cap, and Black (DT #D311) color.

6. Turn Target - Unglazed ceramic, 2 x 2 inch, and Black (DT #D311) color. 13 11 13 - 2 Pool Finishes & Waterproofing
TP-509
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023

7. 8.

Waterline - Glazed ceramic, 6 x 6 inch, and Electric Blue (DT #1194) color.

Waterline Depth Markers - Glazed porcelain, 6 x 6 inch, white background with black 4-inch-high text and smooth surface (II #C6100xx FT and #6105xx IN Series).

PART 3 - EXECUTIONS

3.1 INSTALLATION OF FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
A. Verify surfaces are solid, free of dirt, paint, loose particles, cracks, pits, rough projections, and foreign matter detrimental to adhesion and application of waterproofing.

B. Do not apply waterproofing to dirty, dusty, or surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.

C. Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed.

D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate.

E. Clean, prepare and dampen surfaces to receive waterproofing, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

F. Apply two coats of waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

G. Cure final application in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF POOL PLASTER
A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

C. Protect surfaces near work from damage or disfiguration.

D. Clean concrete/shotcrete surfaces of loose and foreign matter using a 2,500 psi high pressure/velocity water jet spray. Wash surfaces with clean water.

E. Dampen concrete/shotcrete surfaces with clean water immediately prior to plastering.

F. Apply plaster in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ANSI/ASTM C926.

G. Apply to surfaces for a total minimum thickness of 1/2 inch.

H. Provide smooth and consistent steel trowel finish.

I. After manufacturer’s specified curing period, plaster shall be washed and detailed with an acid solution to remove excess residue. Fill swimming pool from the deep end and protect plaster from erosion caused by filling with water and marring from hoses.

J. Maximum variation from flatness shall be 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 13 11 13 - 3 Pool Finishes & Waterproofing
TP-510
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023

3.3 INSTALLATION OF POOL TILE
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of existing surfaces.

C. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration.

D. Vacuum clean existing surfaces and damp clean.

E. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler.

F. Install mortar bed, tile, and grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

G. Apply mortar bed over concrete surfaces to a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch.

H. Lay tile to pattern indicated.

I. Lay tile so upper surface is flush with adjacent finishes.

J. Use trim finishes as indicated at corners.

K. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size.

Make joints watertight without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.

Smooth all cut edges.

L. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.

M. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.

N. Grout tile joints.

END OF SECTION
13 11 13 - 4 Pool Finishes & Waterproofing
TP-511
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023
SECTION 13 11 14

POOL DECK EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes pool deck equipment, safety equipment, and signs.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for all products listed in this Section.

B. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Submit for all competitive equipment, disabled access lift, lifeguard chairs, pool cover, pool vacuum, underwater lights, and water test kit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 3/4-METER DIVING STAND, ANCHOR AND BOARD
A. Stand: Type 304 polished stainless steel support pedestal 8 x 8 x 3/16 inch set at 15 degrees with 1/4 inch top plate and bottom plates. Fulcrum support tubes shall be

1.90 O.D. x 0.145 inch wall thickness 304 stainless steel with rubber pad. Provide

1.90 O.D. x 0.109 inch wall thickness 304 stainless steel handrails and ladder with 19 x 4 inch non-slip cycolac steps.

B. Anchor: 16 x 16 inch stainless steel pedestal cage anchor and two bronze ladder anchors.

C. Board: One piece aluminum springboard with I-beam construction, 12 feet x 18 inches, sealed end construction, and 0.2 inches minimum wall thickness. White latex and sand mixture coating top surface.

D. Model Sportflyte #13517 and #26203 manufactured by Paragon Aquatics. Provide custom pedestal and ladder height for rim flow pool.

2.2 BACKSTROKE PENNANT
A. Assembly consisting of 12 by 18 inch vinyl coated nylon triangular pennants strung on a 3/16 inch diameter vinyl coated stainless steel cable with brass swivel hook at one end and ratchet take-up reel at the other end.

B. Provide 2 in 64 foot length. Colors shall be alternating red and yellow. 13 11 14 - 1 Pool Deck Equipment
TP-512
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023
C. Provide 2 ratchet wrenches.

D. Model "Champion" manufactured by Champion Aquatics.

2.3 BACKSTROKE STANCHION POST
A. Type 304 polished and buffed stainless steel tubing with 1.9 inch outside diameter by

0.145 inch wall thickness, stainless steel cap with eyebolt on the upper end, and an overall height of 8 feet.

B. Provide 4.

C. Model #38106 manufactured by Paragon Aquatics or model #10168 manufactured by SR Smith.

2.4 DISABLED ACCESS LIFT
A. Lift: Assembly shall have powder coated stainless steel and aluminum construction, 24 volt rechargeable battery pack, plastic seat with seat belt, 344 degrees total rotation, and a 300 pound lifting capacity. Supply with foot rest, 2 rotating arm rests, caddie, stainless steel anchor socket with cover, and spanner key. Lift shall accommodate anchor set back of 33 inches from pool wall and comply with all requirements of CBC 11B-1009.2.

B. Provide 1.

C. Model #390-2000 “Splash Extended Reach” manufactured by SR Smith.

2.5 GRAB RAIL
A. Type 304 polished and buffed stainless steel tubing with 1.9 inch outside diameter by

0.109 inch wall thickness. Tubing shall have smooth wrinkle free bends and have a "figure 4" bend.

B. Model #30212 manufactured by Paragon Aquatics or #10173 manufactured by SR Smith.

2.6 GUTTER GRATE
A. Parallel modular interlocking PVC grating 12 inches wide constructed of molded bars

0.625 inch wide with 1 inch depth spaced with 0.375 inch openings. Grating shall have cross bars spaced 3 inches on center and diamond ridged anti-skid top surface.

PVC shall be UV stabilized and white color. Provide recessed stainless steel hold down clips with stainless steel anchor screws for 36 inch maximum anchor spacing on each side of grating.

B. Model “Quiet-flow” manufactured by Lawson Aquatics.

2.7 LIFEGUARD CHAIR - PORTABLE TALL
A. Assembly shall have bolted frame fabricated from 1.9 inch outside diameter by 0.065 inch wall thickness type 304 polished and buffed stainless steel tubing, a fiberglass platform, molded plastic seat mounted 6 feet above deck level and capable of 13 11 14 - 2 Pool Deck Equipment
TP-513
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023
swiveling 360 degrees, molded cycolac ladder steps, 2 solid rubber wheels, and attachments for life ring and umbrella.

B. Provide 1.

C. Model #20302 manufactured by Paragon Aquatics or model #US48500 manufactured by SR Smith

2.8 LIFEGUARD CHAIR - PORTABLE SHORT
A. Assembly shall have welded frame fabricated from 1.9 inch outside diameter by

0.065 inch wall thickness type 304 polished and buffed stainless steel tubing, a 34 inch square fiberglass platform, fiberglass seat mounted 2.5 feet above deck level and capable of swiveling 360 degrees, and attachments for life ring and umbrella.

B. Provide 1.

C. Model #20350 manufactured by Paragon Aquatics or model #LPLS-330 manufactured by SR Smith.

2.9 POOL COVER AND STORAGE REEL
A. Pool Cover: Laminated cover with center layer of 2 pound per square foot 0.125 inch thick cross-linked polyethylene foam and outer layers of ultra-violet stabilized woven polyethylene with weave density of 12 by 10 per square inch. Edges shall be weighted with wrapped ethylene interpolymer alloy and non-corrosive grommets shall be reinforced with additional PVC plate. Cover shall have double needle lockstitch seams, burst strength of 500 pounds per square inch, tensile strength of 371 pounds, insulating R value of 0.5 BTU per hour per square foot per degrees Fahrenheit per inch. Cover shall have a 7 year warranty.

B. Panel Configuration: 4 panels of 14.75 x 75 feet and 3 panels of 15 x 55, and 1 panel of 12 x 10 feet to cover entire pool surface. Provide cut-out in panel for stair rail.

C. Storage Reel: Assembly shall have frame fabricated from stainless steel tubing, stainless steel winding tube with sealed ball bearings at each end, polyurethane wheels, and screw jacks. Provide storage reel cover constructed from vinyl laminated fabric.

D. Reel Configuration: Provide 1 reels with (2) 17 foot long tubes and 1 reel with (1) 17 foot long tube.

E. Model EnergySaver XER manufactured by SR Smith.

2.10 POOL VACUUM
A. Submersible automatic pool vacuum consisting of self contained reusable 2 micron filter bags, high speed drive motor, 2 pump motors, 45 meter cord, molded cleaning brushes, foam cleaning brushes, remote control system, and zero depth sensor.

Vacuum shall be 810 mm wide and have a water filter capacity of 38 cubic meters per hour. Provide storage cart.
13 11 14 - 3 Pool Deck Equipment
TP-514
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023
B. Provide 1.

C. Model Ultramax manufactured by Aquabot.

2.11 RACING LANE FLOAT
A. Assembly shall have 4 inch diameter plastic floats and donut floats strung on a minimum 3/16 inch diameter vinyl coated stainless steel cable with tension spring and twisting turnbuckle tensioning device at opposite ends.

B. Provide 9 in 25 yard length. Colors shall be alternating red and yellow with solid red 15 feet from each end wall with a black band marker at 15 meters from each end wall.

C. Manufactured by Competitor Swim Products or Anti Wave.

2.12 RACING LANE FLOAT REEL AND COVER
A. Assembly shall have stainless steel frame, and 4 inch stainless steel swivel wheels with individual brakes and capacity for 650 feet of 4 inch diameter lanes. Provide with vinyl cover designed to fit over reel with lane floats in place.

B. Provide 1 reel and 1 cover.

C. Model #75111SS manufactured by Paragon Aquatics or model #36000 manufactured by SR Smith.

2.13 RECESSED STEPS
A. Molded foam white cycolac body with 16-1/2 by 5-1/2 by 6 inch opening.

B. Model #32102 manufactured by Paragon Aquatics or model #62-209-4001 manufactured by SR Smith.

2.14 ROPE ANCHOR
A. Stainless steel cup anchor body and recessed threaded eyebolt.

B. Model #70316SS manufactured by Paragon Aquatics or model #WA-100 manufactured by SR Smith.

2.15 SAFETY EQUIPMENT
A. Body Hook: 16 foot aluminum pole and hook with wall anchors. Model #42-065 by Lincoln Equipment. Provide 2.

B. Ring Buoy: 24 inch diameter with 20 foot throw line. Model #44-075 by Lincoln Equipment. Provide 2.

C. Slope Break Lane Float: Assembly shall have 3/4 inch polypropylene rope, brass chromed end hooks, 5 by 9 inch blue and white locking polyethylene floats spaced 3 feet on center, and length as required. Model #44-115, #44-125 and #44-190 by Lincoln Equipment.
13 11 14 - 4 Pool Deck Equipment
TP-515
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023

2.16 SAFETY SIGNS
A. 0.040 inch thick white aluminum with dark contrasting printed text and/or diagrams.

1. Artificial Respiration and CPR Sign: 18 x 24 inches with text 1/4 inch high minimum and illustrations for artificial respiration and CPR procedures. Provide

1. Chemical Hazard Signs: 10 x 10 inches NFPA diamond signs for sodium hypochlorite and muriatic acid with 4 inch high printed number signals for health, flammability and reactivity. Provide 2.

Diarrhea Sign: 12 x 18 inches with 1 inch high letters warning people with diarrhea not to enter the pool. provide 1.

Emergency Phone Number Sign: 24 x 30 inches with 4 inch high letters for the emergency telephone number 911, and 1 inch high letters for the number of the nearest emergency services, and the name and street address of the pool facility. Provide 1.

Keep Closed Sign: 12 x 18 inches with 4 inch high letters mounted on outside of all gates with “KEEP CLOSED”. Provide 5.

Pool Capacity Sign: 18 x 24 inches with 4 inch high letters to indicate maximum number of pool users as follows “SWIMMING POOL CAPACITY 351 PERSONS”. Provide 1 each.

2. 3.

4. 5.

6. B. Manufactured by Zumar Industries, Sign Industries or Seton.

2.17 STAIR HANDRAIL
A. Type 304 polished and buffed stainless steel tubing with 1.9 inch outside diameter by

0.109 inch wall thickness. Tubing shall have smooth wrinkle free bends and be dimensioned as indicated.

B. Manufactured by Paragon Aquatics or SR Smith.

2.18 STANCHION POST SOCKET
A. Minimum 6 inch high cast bronze body to accept 1.9 inch outside diameter pipe tube and internal threading for bronze closure cap or locking cap. Provide one opening device for each socket.

B. Model #38201-TC manufactured by Paragon Aquatics or model #AS-100D manufactured by SR Smith.

2.19 STARTING PLATFORM
A. Assembly shall have a 24 by 32 inch non-skid high density polyethylene track start platform, red color, number plates numbered 1 through 8, mounted 29.5 inches above water level, dual leg stainless steel tubing frame, backstroke bar, and side step.

B. Provide optional Track Start Plus Platform Kit to include adjustable angled back plate and side handles.
13 11 14 - 5 Pool Deck Equipment
TP-516
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023
C. Provide 8.

D. Model #24604 with Track Start Plus manufactured by Paragon Aquatics.

2.20 STARTING PLATFORM ANCHOR
A. Two dual wedge anchors for each platform welded to a stainless steel angle for proper spacing. Anchor body shall be 10 inch deep welded stainless steel with taper lock fit, bronze locking wedge and stainless steel cover. Anchor spacing must match leg spacing of starting platform.

B. Provide one opening device for each pair of anchors.

C. Model #23140DW manufactured by Paragon Aquatics.

2.21 UNDERWATER LIGHT AND NICHE
A. Stainless steel light, niche, and face ring, 55 watt white LED bulb, 120 volt, with low water cut-off switch, and U.L. listed with encapsulated terminals. Cord length as required to change bulb on deck two feet back from pool edge.

B. Model “IntelliBrite 5G” manufactured by Pentair Pool Products.

2.22 WATER TEST KIT
A. Complete water test kit to include carrying case, 2 ounce reagents, 5 slide comparators, and drop test for free and total chlorine, pH, total alkalinity, calcium hardness, total hardness, cyanuric acid and acid/base demand.

B. Model #K-1741C manufactured by Taylor.

2.23 WEDGE ANCHOR
A. Minimum 4.25 inch long cast bronze body to accept 1.9 inch outside diameter pipe tube with bronze locking wedge and stainless steel set bolt and washer.

B. Model #28102 manufactured by Paragon Aquatics or model #IAS-100 manufactured by SR Smith.

2.24 WEDGE ANCHOR ESCUTCHEON PLATE
A. Stainless steel body with stainless steel set screw and designed to fit over wedge anchor.

B. Model #28301SS manufactured by Paragon Aquatics or SR Smith.

PART 3 - EXECUTIONS

3.1 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS AND SOCKETS
A. Install anchors and sockets level and plumb.
13 11 14 - 6 Pool Deck Equipment
TP-517
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023
B. Install anchors and sockets flush with adjacent concrete deck, plaster surface, or tile surface as appropriate.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF COMPETITIVE EQUIPMENT
A. Assemble all components of the following equipment, attach to appropriate anchors and demonstrate operation to Owner:

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. Backstroke pennant.

Backstroke stanchion post.

Racing lane float.

Racing lane float reel.

Starting platform.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF DECK EQUIPMENT
A. Assemble all components of the following equipment and demonstrate operation to Owner.

1. 2.

Pool covers.

Pool vacuum.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF SAFETY SIGNS
A. Install signs with stainless steel expansion anchors and finishing hardware in locations indicated.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF SAFETY EQUIPMENT
A. Install body hook and ring buoy in locations indicated by Owner.

B. Assemble all components of slope break lane float line and attach to appropriate rope anchors.

C. Assemble all components of disabled access lift and place on pool deck to demonstrate operation to Owner.

D. Assemble all components of lifeguard chair and place on pool deck in location indicated by Owner.

END OF SECTION
13 11 14 - 7 Pool Deck Equipment
TP-518
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023
SECTION 13 11 15

POOL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes pool mechanical equipment, piping, valves, and fittings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for all products listed in this Section.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit equipment room plumbing plan and elevations if proposed filter manifold locations vary from locations shown on drawings.

C. Valve Sequencing Chart: Submit chart for approval after completing pool start-up and adjusting all systems.

D. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Submit for filters, heaters, circulation pumps, chemical controllers, chemical feed pumps, and make-up water valve.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All mechanical equipment shall be certified to meet NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) Standard 50 requirements.

B. Install piping in accordance with AWWA (American Water Works Association) Manual 23.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACID FEED PUMP
A. Pump: Peristaltic action pump capable of producing 25 feet of suction lift with mechanical feed rate control, on-off switch, plastic housing, injection fitting, weighted suction line strainer, and wall mounting bracket.

B. Liquid End: Materials shall be suitable for the delivery of hydrochloric acid with connections for 3/8 inch tubing.

C. Performance: 85 gallons per day maximum output, 25 pounds per square inch minimum injection pressure, and 120 volt power connection.

D. Model #85M5 manufactured by Stenner Pump Company.
13 11 15 - 1 Pool Mechanical Equipment
TP-519
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023

2.2 ACID STORAGE TANK
A. Seamless polyethylene double wall construction, 16 inch airtight sealed manway, 52 inch diameter, 56 inch height, and 350 gallon capacity.

B. Bulkhead Fittings: All penetrations shall be on top of tank through PVC compression fittings with viton gaskets. Provide 1-1/2 inch bulkhead fitting with 90 degree female cam action coupler and airtight plug for filling, 2 inch fitting for level gauge, 1 inch fitting for vent pipe, and three 3/8 inch fittings for chemical pump suction lines.

C. Model #TC5256DC with FA and GB Series (Banjo) fittings manufactured by ChemTainer Industries.

2.3 CHEMICAL CONTROLLER
A. Integrated microprocessor based controller to continuously monitor pH, ORP, PPM, temperature, flow, surge chamber water level, and control feeders for sodium hypochlorite and muriatic acid. Assembly shall have the following:

1. Controls: Sealed glass pH electrode, sealed platinum ORP electrode, solid state PPM sensor, temperature sensor, sensor cell assembly with rotary flow switch, flow meter, y-strainer and digital readout indicating pH, ORP, PPM, temperature, and flow. Controls shall be accessible by push-button menu keys with set level from 0 to 14 for pH and 0 to 10 PPM for chlorine. Controller shall have RS-232 communication port for remote data downloading, flow sensor input for flow monitoring and water level sensor with automatic fill valve control.

Circuitry: 115 volt power connection with 2 outputs of 5 amps each for chemical feeders.

Housing: Acrylic or fiberglass enclosure.

2. 3.

B. Model #PC3000 with optional PPM sensor manufactured by Chemtrol.

2.4 CHEMICAL TANK LEVEL GAUGE
A. Double plastic dome and nut assembly, gasket, 2 inch threaded bushing, polyethylene indicator tube with tank level in 1/8 increments, polyethylene float with plastic rod assembly. All internal tank parts shall be suitable for use with muriatic acid and sodium hypochlorite, and manufactured from plastic.

B. Manufactured by Krueger Sentry Gauge.

2.5 CHLORINE FEED PUMP
A. Pump: Peristaltic action pump capable of producing 25 feet of suction lift with mechanical feed rate control, on-off switch, plastic housing, injection fitting, weighted suction line strainer, and wall mounting bracket.

B. Liquid End: Materials shall be suitable for the delivery of sodium hypochlorite with connections for 3/8 inch tubing.

C. Performance: 120 gallons per day maximum output, 25 pounds per square inch minimum injection pressure, and 120 volt power connection. 13 11 15 - 2 Pool Mechanical Equipment
TP-520
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023
D. Model #170DM4 manufactured by Stenner Pump Company.

2.6 CHLORINE STORAGE TANK
A. Seamless polyethylene double wall construction, 16 inch airtight non-vented manway, 59 inch diameter, 71 inch height, and 500 gallon capacity.

B. Bulkhead Fittings: All penetrations shall be on top of tank through PVC compression fittings with viton gaskets. Provide 2 inch bulkhead fitting with 90 degree male cam action coupler and airtight cap for filling, 2 inch fitting for level gauge, 1 inch fitting for vent pipe, and 3/8 inch fitting for chemical pump suction line.

C. Model #TC5971DC with FA and GB Series (Banjo) fittings manufactured by ChemTainer Industries.

2.7 CIRCULATION PUMP
A. Type: Horizontal, close coupled, end suction centrifugal pump, bronze fitted with cast iron volute, replaceable bronze wear rings, enclosed bronze impeller, leakless mechanical seal, and fuse coated cast iron wetted surfaces. 5 inch suction and 4 inch discharge with 125# ANSI flanges. Pump shall be certified to meet NSF Standard 50 requirements.

B. Motor: Premium efficiency, 93 percent minimum, 1760 rpm, 20 hp, 480 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz, 1.15 service factor, inverter rated and TEFC enclosure.

C. Performance: 850 gpm @ 65 feet of head with 81 percent efficiency, and13.6 feet NPSHR.

D. Model 40957 LC manufactured by Paco Pumps.

2.8 CIRCULATION PUMP REDUCER COUPLING
A. Stainless steel body with 125# ANSI flanged ends, 50 pounds per square inch operating pressure, eccentric type at pump suction and concentric type at pump discharge.

B. Manufactured by Aquify Systems.

2.9 CIRCULATION PUMP STRAINER
A. Stainless steel body, straight type with 6 inch flanged ends, 1 inch thick transparent acrylic lid, stainless steel toggle bolts with fiberglass hand knobs, bottom drain connection, pressure sensors, and stainless steel strainer basket with 5/32 inch perforations..

B. Provide 1 additional strainer basket.

C. Model #STR-0606-SS4 manufactured by Aquify Systems.
13 11 15 - 3 Pool Mechanical Equipment
TP-521
City of Gardena
GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATICS & SENIOR CENTER 06/30/2023

2.10 FILTER
A. Regenerative media type with NSF 50 listing for flow of 1.5 gallons per minute per square foot of filter area. System shall have 1 tank with a total filter area of 700 square feet and the following components:

1. Tank: Fiberglass tank designed for seismic installation, 42 inch diameter, 76.5 inch height with manhole access. Tank shall be designed for a working pressure of 50 pounds per square inch.

Components: Flexible tube filter elements with high strength polyester braid outer wall and stainless steel spring supported by a stainless steel tube sheet and lift shaft. System shall include a pneumatically operated bump mechanism to dislodge the media and recoat filter elements, vacuum transfer system to recharge media, all necessary pneumatic butterfly valves for operation, sight glass, drain valve, 10 inch influent check valve, and air compressor.

Automatic Controller: System operation including filtration and regeneration cycles shall be automatically controlled with a programmable micro processor capable of the following functions:

2. 3.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.